729712
102
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/103
Next page
Flachbildfernseher
BEDIENUNGS-
ANLEITUNG
Nordmende Wegavision FHD24A/32A/43A
1
Deutsch
Inhalt
1. Wichtige Sicherheitsinformationen ......................................................................... 2
Vorsicht �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2
Rechtliche Hinweise ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������3
2. LCD-Fernseher installieren ...................................................................................... 4
Lieferumfang������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������4
Standfuß befestigen / Wandmontage ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������5
3. Übersicht des Fernsehers ........................................................................................ 6
Komponenten und Tasten ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������6
4. Antenne verbinden ................................................................................................... 7
5. Externe Geräte verbinden ........................................................................................ 8
6. Fernbedienung .......................................................................................................... 9
Batterien in die Fernbedienung einlegen �����������������������������������������������������������������������������������9
Fernbedienung verwenden ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������9
7. Grundlegende Funktionen des Fernsehers .......................................................... 11
Fernseher ein- und ausschalten ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 11
Erstinstallation ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 11
Automatische Sendersuche ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 11
Programmwahl ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 11
Lautstärkeregelung ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������12
Eingangsquelle auswählen ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������12
8. Menüfunktionen ...................................................................................................... 13
Sender-Menü �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 13
Bild-Menü ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 14
Sound-Menü ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 14
Zeit-Menü ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 15
Sperren-Menü������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 15
Setup-Menü ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 16
9. Multimedia ............................................................................................................... 17
10. Fehlerbehebung ...................................................................................................... 19
11. Technische Daten ................................................................................................... 20
Unterstützte Signale ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������20
Entsorgung ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������20
2
Deutsch
Wichtige Sicherheitsinformationen
1
Vorsicht
1� Diese Bedienungsanleitung aufmerksam durchlesen�
2� Diese Bedienungsanleitung für späteres Nachschlagen aufbewahren�
3� Alle Warnungen beachten�
4� Alle Anleitungen befolgen�
5� Fernseher nicht in der Nähe von Wasser verwenden�
6� Nur mit einem trockenen Tuch reinigen�
7� Ventilationsö󰀨nungen nicht abdecken. Gemäß Herstellerangaben installieren.
8� Nicht in der Nähe von Wärmequellen wie Heizkörpern, Öfen oder anderen
wärmeabstrahlenden Geräten (einschließlich Verstärkern) installieren.
9� Netzkabel so verlegen, dass niemand darüber stolpern kann oder das Kabel geknickt wird,
insbesondere am Stecker, der Steckdose sowie am Geräteaustritt.
10� Nur vom Hersteller vorgegebenes Zubehör verwenden�
11� Fernseher während Gewittern oder längeren Zeiten des Nichtgebrauchs vom Netz trennen.
12� Reparaturarbeiten nur durch qualiziertes Personal. Eine Wartung ist erforderlich, wenn das
Gerät beschädigt ist, u.a. wenn das Netzkabel oder der Netzstecker beschädigt ist, Flüssigkeit
oder Gegenstände in das Gerät eingedrungen sind, das Gerät Regen oder Feuchtigkeit
ausgesetzt war oder das Gerät nicht ordnungsgemäß funktioniert oder fallengelassen wurde.
13� WARNUNG: Um die Gefahr von Feuer oder Stromschlag zu vermeiden, muss der Fernseher
vor Regen und Feuchtigkeit geschützt werden�
14� Das Gerät ist nicht spritz- oder tropfwasserdicht. Stellen Sie keine mit Flüssigkeit gefüllten
Gegenstände wie Vasen auf das Gerät.
15� Der Netzstecker oder der Gerätestecker müssen immer frei zugänglich sein.
16� Gebrauch im Außenbereich: Dieser Fernseher ist nicht für den Außengebrauch geeignet.
Schützen Sie den Fernseher vor Regen, da anderenfalls die Gefahr von Feuer oder
Stromschlag besteht� Schützen Sie den Fernseher vor direkter Sonneneinstrahlung, da er
anderenfalls erhitzen und beschädigt werden könnte�
Sicherheit:
UM DIE GEFAHR VON STROMSCHLÄGEN ZU VERMEIDEN,
RÜCKSEITIGE ABDECKUNG (ODER RÜCKSEITE) NICHT
ENTFERNEN� ES BEFINDEN SICH KEINE VOM NUTZER ZU
WARTENDEN TEILE IM INNEREN. REPARATUR NUR DURCH
QUALIFIZIERTE FACHKRÄFTE.
Gefährliche Spannung: Der Blitz mit Pfeilspitze innerhalb eines
gleichseitigen Dreiecks warnt den Nutzer vor gefährlicher
Spannung im Inneren des Produktes, die stark genug ist,
Stromschläge zu verursachen�
Anleitung:
Das Ausrufezeichen innerhalb eines gleichseitigen Dreiecks
weist den Nutzer auf wichtige Gebrauchsanleitungen in der
Begleitliteratur des Produkts hin�
3
Deutsch
Wichtige Sicherheitsinformationen 1
Vorsicht
WARNUNG!
Installieren Sie den Fernseher nicht in einer instabilen Position� Der Fernseher könnte
herunterfallen und dadurch schwerwiegende oder sogar tödliche Unfälle verursachen�
Viele Verletzungen, insbesondere bei Kindern, können durch Einhaltung folgender
Vorsichtsmaßnahmen vermieden werden�
* Verwenden Sie nur vom Hersteller des Fernsehers empfohlene Wandhalterungen�
* Verwenden Sie nur Möbel, die dem Gewicht des Fernsehers standhalten können.
* Achten Sie darauf, dass keine Teile des Fernsehers über das tragende Möbelstück hervorragen�
* Stellen Sie den Fernseher nicht auf erhöhte Möbelstücke (z. B. Hängeschränke oder
Bücherregale), ohne sowohl das Möbelstück als auch den Fernseher mit einer entsprechenden
Halterung zu sichern�
* Stellen Sie den Fernseher nicht auf Sto󰀨e oder andere Materialien, die sich zwischen dem
Gerät und der tragenden Fläche benden.
* Erklären Sie Kindern die Gefahren, die entstehen, wenn sie auf Möbelstücke klettern um den
Fernseher oder dessen Tasten zu erreichen�
Rechtliche Hinweise
Hiermit erklärt TechniSat, dass der Funkanlagentyp Nordmende Wegavision FHD24A/32A/43A
der Richtlinie 2014/53/EU entspricht� Der vollständige Text der EU-Konformitätserklärung ist
unter der Internetadresse http://konf.tsat.de/?ID=11704 verfügbar:
Wegavision FHD24A, Wegavision 32A, Wegavision 43A und TechniSat sind eingetragene
Warenzeichen der:
TechniSat Digital GmbH
TechniPark
Julius-Saxler-Straße 3
D-54550 Daun/Eifel
www�technisat�de
NORDMENDE ist eine Marke der Technicolor oder verbundener Unternehmen, die unter Lizenz
der TechniSat Digital GmbH verwendet wird.
Namen der erwähnten Firmen, Institutionen oder Marken sind Warenzeichen oder eingetragene
Warenzeichen der jeweiligen Inhaber
Dieses Produkt ist qualitätsgeprüft und mit der gesetzlichen Gewährleistungszeit von 24 Monaten
ab Kaufdatum versehen� Bitte bewahren Sie den Rechnungsbeleg als Kaufnachweis auf� Bei
Gewährleistungsansprüchen wenden Sie sich bitte an den Händler des Produktes.
Hinweis!
Für Fragen und Informationen oder wenn es mit diesem Gerät zu einem Problem kommt, ist
unsere Technische Hotline Mo. - Fr. 8:00 - 20:00 unter Tel.: 06592/712 1500 erreichbar.
Für eine evtentuell erforderliche Einsendung des Gerätes verwenden Sie bitte ausschließlich
folgende Anschrift:
TechniSat Digital GmbH
Service-Center
Nordstr� 4a
39418 Staßfurt
4
Deutsch
2
Lieferumfang
Überprüfen Sie, ob die folgenden Teile im Lieferumfang Ihres LCD-Fernsehers enthalten sind.
Falls Teile fehlen sollten, wenden Sie sich bitte an Ihren Händler
Fernbedienung 2 Batterien Kurzanleitung
LCD-Fernseher
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/- -
TIMESHIFT
LIST
Mini-YPbPr-Kabel
Mini-AV-Kabel
LCD-Fernseher installieren
5
Deutsch
Mounting on a wall
Attach an optional wall mount bracket at the rear
of the TV carefully and install the wall mount
bracket on a solid wall perpendicular to the
floor. When you attach the TV to other building
materials, please contact qualified personnel.
LG recommends that wall mounting be
performed by a qualified professional installer.
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
Make sure to use screws and wall mount
bracket that meet the VESA standard. Standard
dimensions for the wall mount kits are described
in the following table.
Separate purchase(Wall Mounting Bracket)
Model
VESA (A x B) 200 x 200
Standard
screw
M4
Number of
screws
2
100 x 100
M4
2
Wall mount bracket
A
B
43”24”/32”
43”24”/32”
(*Not Provided) (*Not Provided)
Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3
24”: Insert 2 screws
32”/43”: Insert 4 screws
1. Place the TV set on soft cloth or cushion with face down.Place the base in position as shown.
2. I ver.
3. Place the TV upward.
FrontBack
2
LCD-Fernseher installieren
Standfuß befestigen / Wandmontage
1� Legen Sie den Fernseher mit der Vorderseite auf einen weichen Untergrund oder eine
Polsterung� Positionieren Sie das Unterteil wie folgt�
2� Stecken Sie die Schrauben (mitgeliefert) in die Schraublöcher und ziehen Sie diese mit einem
Schraubenzieher fest�
3� Stellen Sie den Fernseher wieder aufrecht hin�
Mounting on a wall
Attach an optional wall mount bracket at the rear
of the TV carefully and install the wall mount
bracket on a solid wall perpendicular to the
floor. When you attach the TV to other building
materials, please contact qualified personnel.
LG recommends that wall mounting be
performed by a qualified professional installer.
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
Make sure to use screws and wall mount
bracket that meet the VESA standard. Standard
dimensions for the wall mount kits are described
in the following table.
Separate purchase(Wall Mounting Bracket)
Model
VESA (A x B) 200 x 200
Standard
screw
M4
Number of
screws
2
100 x 100
M4
2
Wall mount bracket
A
B
43”24”/32”
43”24”/32”
(*Not Provided) (*Not Provided)
Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3
24”: Insert 2 screws
32”/43”: Insert 4 screws
1. Place the TV set on soft cloth or cushion with face down.Place the base in position as shown.
2. I ver.
3. Place the TV upward.
FrontBack
Abbildung 1 Abbildung 2
Rückseite Vorderseite
24": 2 Schrauben anstecken
32"/43": 4 Schrauben anstecken
Abbildung 3
Wandbefestigung
Befestigen Sie vorsichtig eine optionale
Wandhalterung an der Rückseite des Gerätes
und installieren Sie die Wandhalterung
senkrecht zum Boden an einer stabilen
Wand� Falls Sie den Fernseher an anderen
Konstruktionen befestigen möchten, wenden
Sie sich bitte an eine qualizierte Fachkraft.
Wir empfehlen die Wandinstallation von einem
professionellen Installateur durchführen zu
lassen�
Verwenden Sie nur Schrauben und
Wandhalterungen, die den VESA-Normen
entsprechen� Die Standardabmessungen
der Wandhalterungen nden Sie in der
nachfolgenden Tabelle�
Separat erhältlich (Wandhalterung)
Modell 24"/32" 43"
VESA (A x B) 100 x 100 200 x 200
Standardschraube M4 M4
Anzahl der
Schrauben
2 2
Wandhalterung
24"/32"
(*nicht enthalten)
43"
(*nicht enthalten)
Mounting on a wall
Attach an optional wall mount bracket at the rear
of the TV carefully and install the wall mount
bracket on a solid wall perpendicular to the
floor. When you attach the TV to other building
materials, please contact qualified personnel.
LG recommends that wall mounting be
performed by a qualified professional installer.
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
Make sure to use screws and wall mount
bracket that meet the VESA standard. Standard
dimensions for the wall mount kits are described
in the following table.
Separate purchase(Wall Mounting Bracket)
Model
VESA (A x B) 200 x 200
Standard
screw
M4
Number of
screws
2
100 x 100
M4
2
Wall mount bracket
A
B
43”24”/32”
43”24”/32”
(*Not Provided) (*Not Provided)
Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3
24”: Insert 2 screws
32”/43”: Insert 4 screws
1. Place the TV set on soft cloth or cushion with face down.Place the base in position as shown.
2. I ver.
3. Place the TV upward.
FrontBack
Mounting on a wall
Attach an optional wall mount bracket at the rear
of the TV carefully and install the wall mount
bracket on a solid wall perpendicular to the
floor. When you attach the TV to other building
materials, please contact qualified personnel.
LG recommends that wall mounting be
performed by a qualified professional installer.
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
Make sure to use screws and wall mount
bracket that meet the VESA standard. Standard
dimensions for the wall mount kits are described
in the following table.
Separate purchase(Wall Mounting Bracket)
Model
VESA (A x B) 200 x 200
Standard
screw
M4
Number of
screws
2
100 x 100
M4
2
Wall mount bracket
A
B
43”24”/32”
43”24”/32”
(*Not Provided) (*Not Provided)
Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3
24”: Insert 2 screws
32”/43”: Insert 4 screws
1. Place the TV set on soft cloth or cushion with face down.Place the base in position as shown.
2. I ver.
3. Place the TV upward.
FrontBack
Mounting on a wall
Attach an optional wall mount bracket at the rear
of the TV carefully and install the wall mount
bracket on a solid wall perpendicular to the
floor. When you attach the TV to other building
materials, please contact qualified personnel.
LG recommends that wall mounting be
performed by a qualified professional installer.
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
Make sure to use screws and wall mount
bracket that meet the VESA standard. Standard
dimensions for the wall mount kits are described
in the following table.
Separate purchase(Wall Mounting Bracket)
Model
VESA (A x B) 200 x 200
Standard
screw
M4
Number of
screws
2
100 x 100
M4
2
Wall mount bracket
A
B
43”24”/32”
43”24”/32”
(*Not Provided) (*Not Provided)
Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3
24”: Insert 2 screws
32”/43”: Insert 4 screws
1. Place the TV set on soft cloth or cushion with face down.Place the base in position as shown.
2. I ver.
3. Place the TV upward.
FrontBack
6
Deutsch
Übersicht des Fernsehers3
Taste Erläuterung
1/BETRIEB Fernseher einschalten/in Standby schalten�
2SOURCE Eingangsquelle auswählen�
3MENU OSD-Menü aufrufen/verlassen.
4 + CH - Sender aufwärts/abwärts im TV-Modus, oder Option auswählen im
OSD-Menü.
5+ VOL - Lautstärke erhöhen/reduzieren oder eine im OSD-Menü markierte
Option einstellen.
Komponenten und Tasten
7
Deutsch
Antenne verbinden 4
ANSCHLÜSSE VORNEHMEN
Sie können unterschiedliche externe Geräte
mit dem Fernseher verbinden und den
entsprechenden Eingangsmodus zur Auswahl
des externen Geräts einschalten. Informieren
Sie sich in der Bedienungsanleitung Ihres
externen Geräts näher über die Verbindung.
Mögliche externe Geräte: Blu-ray-/DVD-Player,
Audiosysteme, USB-Speichergeräte, PC und
andere externe Geräte.
Antenne/LNB verbinden
Verbinden Sie den Fernseher unter
Verwendung eines RF-Kabels (75 Ω) mit einer
Antennenbuchse�
MAKING CONNECTIONS
Connect various external devices to the TV
and switch input modes to select an external
device. For more information of external devices
connection, refer to the manual provided with
each device.
Available external devices are: HD receivers,
DVD players, audio systems, USB
storage devices, PC, and other external
devices.
NOTE
yThe external device connection may differ
from the model.
yConnect external devices to the TV
regardless of the order of the TV port.
yRefer to the external equipments manual
for operating instructions.
yIn PC mode, there may be noise
associated with the resolution, vertical
pattern, contrast or brightness. If noise is
present, change the PC output to another
resolution, change the refresh rate to
another rate or adjust the brightness and
contrast on the PICTURE menu until the
picture is clear.
yIn PC mode, some resolution settings
may not work properly depending on the
graphics card.
Connect the TV to a wall antenna socket with an
RF cable (75 ).
NOTE
yUse a signal splitter to use more than 2
TVs.
yIf the image quality is poor, install a signal
amplifier properly to improve the image
quality.
yIf the image quality is poor with an
antenna connected, try to realign the
antenna in the correct direction.
yAn antenna cable and converter are not
supplied.
ySupported DTV Audio: MPEG, Dolby
Digital.
Antenna connection
SAT/LNB
AERIAL/
CABLE
Verwenden Sie einen Signalsplitter für die
Nutzung von mehr als 2 Fernsehern�
Falls die Bildqualität schlecht ist, installieren
Sie ordnungsgemäß einen Signalverstärker,
um die Bildqualität zu verbessern�
Falls eine Antenne verbunden und die
Bildqualität schlecht ist, versuchen Sie, die
Antenne entsprechend auszurichten�
Antennenkabel und Konverter sind nicht im
Lieferumfang enthalten�
Unterstützte DTV-Audioformate: MPEG, Dolby
Digital�
HINWEIS
MAKING CONNECTIONS
Connect various external devices to the TV
and switch input modes to select an external
device. For more information of external devices
connection, refer to the manual provided with
each device.
Available external devices are: HD receivers,
DVD players, audio systems, USB
storage devices, PC, and other external
devices.
NOTE
yThe external device connection may differ
from the model.
yConnect external devices to the TV
regardless of the order of the TV port.
yRefer to the external equipments manual
for operating instructions.
yIn PC mode, there may be noise
associated with the resolution, vertical
pattern, contrast or brightness. If noise is
present, change the PC output to another
resolution, change the refresh rate to
another rate or adjust the brightness and
contrast on the PICTURE menu until the
picture is clear.
yIn PC mode, some resolution settings
may not work properly depending on the
graphics card.
Connect the TV to a wall antenna socket with an
RF cable (75 ).
NOTE
yUse a signal splitter to use more than 2
TVs.
yIf the image quality is poor, install a signal
amplifier properly to improve the image
quality.
yIf the image quality is poor with an
antenna connected, try to realign the
antenna in the correct direction.
yAn antenna cable and converter are not
supplied.
ySupported DTV Audio: MPEG, Dolby
Digital.
Antenna connection
SAT/LNB
AERIAL/
CABLE
HINWEIS
Die Verbindung mit externen Geräten kann je
nach Modell variieren�
Schließen Sie externe Geräte unabhängig von
der Reihenfolge der TV-Anschlüsse an den
Fernseher an�
Informieren Sie sich in der Bedienungsanleitung
des externen Geräts über dessen Funktionsweise.
Im PC-Modus können Störungen in Bezug auf
Auösung, vertikales Muster, Kontrast und
Helligkeit auftreten� Falls Störungen auftreten,
ändern Sie die Auösung des PC-Ausgangs,
ändern Sie die Aktualisierungsrate oder stellen
Sie im BILD-Menü Helligkeit und Kontrast ein,
bis das Bild schärfer ist�
Einige Auösungen funktionieren im PC-
Modus möglicherweise je nach Grakkarte
nicht ordnungsgemäß�
MAKING CONNECTIONS
Connect various external devices to the TV
and switch input modes to select an external
device. For more information of external devices
connection, refer to the manual provided with
each device.
Available external devices are: HD receivers,
DVD players, audio systems, USB
storage devices, PC, and other external
devices.
NOTE
yThe external device connection may differ
from the model.
yConnect external devices to the TV
regardless of the order of the TV port.
yRefer to the external equipments manual
for operating instructions.
yIn PC mode, there may be noise
associated with the resolution, vertical
pattern, contrast or brightness. If noise is
present, change the PC output to another
resolution, change the refresh rate to
another rate or adjust the brightness and
contrast on the PICTURE menu until the
picture is clear.
yIn PC mode, some resolution settings
may not work properly depending on the
graphics card.
Connect the TV to a wall antenna socket with an
RF cable (75 ).
NOTE
yUse a signal splitter to use more than 2
TVs.
yIf the image quality is poor, install a signal
amplifier properly to improve the image
quality.
yIf the image quality is poor with an
antenna connected, try to realign the
antenna in the correct direction.
yAn antenna cable and converter are not
supplied.
ySupported DTV Audio: MPEG, Dolby
Digital.
Antenna connection
SAT/LNB
AERIAL/
CABLE
8
Deutsch
Externe Geräte verbinden
5
Schalten Sie die Stromversorgung aus, bevor Sie den Fernseher mit einem externen Gerät
verbinden�
Der Fernseher kann unterschiedliche Multimedia-Quellen abspielen, je nachdem welcher
Anschluss verbunden ist (Blu-ray-Player, PC, usw.) und welche Eingangsquelle aktiviert ist.
CamcorderDVD playerPC (HDMI-output)Blu-ray disc playerAudio system
DVD player with
component output
Headphone
USB
ARCSCART
TV
CI SLOT
The sound
system
HDMI1(ARC)
AERIAL/CABLESAT/LNB
VGA IN PC AUDIO IN
USB EARPHONE
HDMI2 HDMI3
MINI AV IN
MINI
YPBPR IN S/PDIF OUT
CI SLOT
SCART IN
PC-Anschluss
DVD-Player mit
Komponentenausgang
Audioanlage
Kopfhörer
Common Interface
HDMI
(ARC)
Audiosystem DVD-Player Camcorder
Blu-ray-Player PC
(HDMI-Ausgang)
9
Deutsch
Fernbedienung 6
1� Richten Sie den Sensor der Fernbedienung
direkt auf die untere rechte Ecke des
Fernsehers�
2� Die Reichweite der Fernbedienung beträgt
ca� 10 Meter mit einem Winkel von ca� 30
Grad.
3� Entfernen Sie Hindernisse zwischen der
Fernbedienung und dem Sensor
☼ Falls Sie die Fernbedienung längere Zeit
nicht verwenden werden, entfernen Sie die
Batterien�
☼ Falls die Fernbedienung nicht ordnungsgemäß
funktioniert oder die Reichweite verringert ist,
ersetzen Sie beide Batterien durch neue�
Batterien in die Fernbedienung einlegen
1� Entfernen Sie die Batteriefachabdeckung, indem Sie diese auf der Unterseite der
Fernbedienung nach unten schieben und die Abdeckung dann anheben�
2� Legen Sie die Batterien gemäß den Markierungen (+) und (-) im Batteriefach ein.
3� Schließen Sie die Batteriefachabdeckung wieder durch Aufsetzen und Hochschieben des
Deckels�
VORSICHT
Verwenden Sie nur AAA-Batterien�
Alte und neue Batterien nicht gemeinsam verwenden� Andernfalls könnten die Batterien
beschädigt werden oder auslaufen, was wiederum Feuer oder Verletzungen verursachen kann�
Legen Sie die Batterien gemäß den Markierungen (+) und (-) ein. Bei unsachgemäßer Installation
können Batterien auslaufen oder Fehlfunktionen verursachen�
Entsorgen Sie Batterien gemäß den örtlich geltenden Gesetzen und Vorschriften.
Halten Sie die Batterien von Kindern oder Haustieren fern�
Entnehmen Sie die Batterien, falls Sie die Fernbedienung längere Zeit nicht verwenden werden�
Fernbedienung verwenden
30 30
IR Receiver
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
IR-Empfänger
10
Deutsch
Fernbedienung
6
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
1. BETRIEB Gerät ein-/ausschalten
2. STUMM Ton stumm bzw� wieder einschalten
3. P.MODE Bildmodus auswählen
4. S.MODE Tonmodus auswählen
5. FAV Favoritenliste ö󰀨nen
6. SLEEP Sleep-Timer zum Ausschalten des Fernsehers nach
Ablauf der ausgewählten Zeit aktivieren
7. FREEZE Videoanzeige pausieren� Erneut drücken, um Anzeige
wieder fortzusetzen
8. CH.LIST Programmliste anzeigen
9. AUTO Automatische Einstellung im VGA-Modus
10. ASPECT Bildformate durchschalten
11. 0-9 Programmauswahl per Programmplatzeingabe
12. -/-- Programmnummer eingeben, die größer ist als 9
13.
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
Zum zuletzt angesehenen Programm zurückkehren
14. MENU Bildschirmmenü (OSD) ö󰀨nen
15. EXIT Bildschirmmenü verlassen
16. ▲▼◄► Mit den Pfeiltasten wählen Sie Menüoptionen oder
Einstellungen aus
17. OK Bestätigungstaste; OSD-Menüoptionen auswählen
18. SOURCE Verfügbare Quellen anzeigen und auswählen
19. DISPLAY Informationsfenster ö󰀨nen
20. CH (+/-) Zum nächsten/vorherigen TV-/Radioprogramm schalten
21. VOL (+/-) Lautstärke des Fernsehers erhöhen oder reduzieren
22. TEXT Videotextmodus aktivieren
23. EPG Elektronische Programmzeitschrift ö󰀨nen
24. AUDIO Auswahl verfügbarer Audiosprachen bzw. PAL-BG/Stereo
oder PAL-BG Mono (ATV)
25. SUBTITLE Untertitelmenü zur Auswahl von Untertiteln ö󰀨nen
26. INDEX
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
Liste und Informationen über die Videotextseiten ö󰀨nen
Vorheriges/vorherigen Kapitel, Titel oder Track abspielen
27. HOLD
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
Aktuelle Videotextseite auf dem Bildschirm einfrieren
Nächstes/nächsten Kapitel, Titel oder Track abspielen
28. SIZE
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
Bildgröße im Videotextmodus ändern
Rückwärts suchen
29. REVEAL
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
Versteckte Inhalte im Videotext ein-/ausblenden
Vorwärts suchen
30. TIMESHIFT
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
Timeshift-Funktion starten
Wiedergabe der aktuellen Sendung starten oder beenden
31. LIST
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
PVR-Dateiliste anzeigen
Wiedergabe der aktuellen Sendung beenden
32.
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
Aufnahme starten
33. SUBPAGE Untermenü des Videotextmodus ö󰀨nen
34. FARBTASTEN Funktion je nach Einblendung im OSD-Menü
11
Deutsch
Fernseher ein- und ausschalten
Drücken Sie die Taste BETRIEB auf der Fernbedienung�
Sie können auch die Betriebstaste am unteren/seitlichen
Bedienfeld verwenden�
* Falls 15 Minuten lang kein Eingangssignal erfasst wird,
schaltet sich der Fernseher automatisch aus�
Erstinstallation
Wählen Sie in der Erstinstallation aus, in welcher Sprache das OSD-Menü und Informationen am
Bildschirm eingeblendet werden sollen, in welchem Land das Gerät betrieben wird, ob sie den
Heim- oder Vorführmodus verwenden möchten sowie welches Empfangssignal Sie verwenden�
Verwenden Sie die Tasten ◄/►, um den Wert in der markierten Zeile zu ändern.
Verwenden Sie die Tasten ▼/▲, um die Markierung in eine andere Zeile zu bewegen.
OK
Germany
Environment
Digital Type
Home Mode
DVB-T
Automatische Sendersuche
Für die ATV-Sendersuche drücken Sie die Menü-Taste und die linke Pfeiltaste, um die ATV-
Suche zu überspringen� Für die DTV-Sendersuche drücken Sie die Menü-Taste und die linke
Pfeiltaste, um die DTV-Suche zu überspringen�
Thailand
OK
Sender einschalten
1� Sendertasten verwenden
Drücken Sie die Taste +CH-, um einen anderen Sender
einzuschalten� Die Sender werden nacheinander eingeschaltet�
Es können alle gespeicherten Sender wiedergegeben werden�
Gelöschte oder nicht gespeicherte Sender werden nicht angezeigt.
* Drücken Sie die Taste , um zum vorherigen Sender
zurückzukehren�
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
MENU EXIT
FREEZE
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
+
SOURCE
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
LIST
Grundlegende Funktionen des Fernsehers 7
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
1. BETRIEB Gerät ein-/ausschalten
2. STUMM Ton stumm bzw� wieder einschalten
3. P.MODE Bildmodus auswählen
4. S.MODE Tonmodus auswählen
5. FAV Favoritenliste ö󰀨nen
6. SLEEP Sleep-Timer zum Ausschalten des Fernsehers nach
Ablauf der ausgewählten Zeit aktivieren
7. FREEZE Videoanzeige pausieren� Erneut drücken, um Anzeige
wieder fortzusetzen
8. CH.LIST Programmliste anzeigen
9. AUTO Automatische Einstellung im VGA-Modus
10. ASPECT Bildformate durchschalten
11. 0-9 Programmauswahl per Programmplatzeingabe
12. -/-- Programmnummer eingeben, die größer ist als 9
13.
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
Zum zuletzt angesehenen Programm zurückkehren
14. MENU Bildschirmmenü (OSD) ö󰀨nen
15. EXIT Bildschirmmenü verlassen
16. ▲▼◄► Mit den Pfeiltasten wählen Sie Menüoptionen oder
Einstellungen aus
17. OK Bestätigungstaste; OSD-Menüoptionen auswählen
18. SOURCE Verfügbare Quellen anzeigen und auswählen
19. DISPLAY Informationsfenster ö󰀨nen
20. CH (+/-) Zum nächsten/vorherigen TV-/Radioprogramm schalten
21. VOL (+/-) Lautstärke des Fernsehers erhöhen oder reduzieren
22. TEXT Videotextmodus aktivieren
23. EPG Elektronische Programmzeitschrift ö󰀨nen
24. AUDIO Auswahl verfügbarer Audiosprachen bzw. PAL-BG/Stereo
oder PAL-BG Mono (ATV)
25. SUBTITLE Untertitelmenü zur Auswahl von Untertiteln ö󰀨nen
26. INDEX
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
Liste und Informationen über die Videotextseiten ö󰀨nen
Vorheriges/vorherigen Kapitel, Titel oder Track abspielen
27. HOLD
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
Aktuelle Videotextseite auf dem Bildschirm einfrieren
Nächstes/nächsten Kapitel, Titel oder Track abspielen
28. SIZE
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
Bildgröße im Videotextmodus ändern
Rückwärts suchen
29. REVEAL
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
Versteckte Inhalte im Videotext ein-/ausblenden
Vorwärts suchen
30. TIMESHIFT
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
Timeshift-Funktion starten
Wiedergabe der aktuellen Sendung starten oder beenden
31. LIST
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
PVR-Dateiliste anzeigen
Wiedergabe der aktuellen Sendung beenden
32.
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
Aufnahme starten
33. SUBPAGE Untermenü des Videotextmodus ö󰀨nen
34. FARBTASTEN Funktion je nach Einblendung im OSD-Menü
12
Deutsch
Lautstärke einstellen
Drücken Sie die Tasten + VOL - zum Ändern der
Lautstärke�
Drücken Sie die Taste STUMM, um den Ton
auszuschalten�
Drücken Sie STUMM erneut oder die Tasten VOL +,
um den Ton wieder einzuschalten�
Eingangsquelle auswählen
Auswahl des TV-Modus oder anderer Eingangsgeräte,
die mit dem Fernseher verbunden sind�
1� Drücken Sie die Taste Source, um die Liste mit den
Eingangsquellen anzuzeigen�
2� Drücken Sie ▼/▲ oder SOURCE, um die gewünschte
Eingangsquelle zu markieren. (Satellit, DTV, ATV, AV, PC,
SCART, Component, HDMI, Media).
3� Drücken Sie OK, um die Eingangsquelle einzuschalten�
+
SOURCE
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
LIST
OK
HDMI3
Grundlegende Funktionen des Fernsehers
7
13
Deutsch
Menübetrieb 8
Befolgen Sie die nachfolgenden Schritte für die Konguration der Menüeinstellungen in späteren
Kapiteln�
Anleitungen und Abbildungen der Menüeinstellungen werden normalerweise für die TV-Eingangsquelle
erläutert� Ausnahmen werden speziell hervorgehoben�
Einige Funktionen können je nach Signalquelle nicht konguriert werden.
Menü ö󰀨nen
Drücken Sie die Taste [MENU], um das Hauptmenü zu ö󰀨nen.
Drücken Sie die Tasten [◄/►], um im Hauptmenü ein Untermenü auszuwählen.
Drücken Sie [OK] oder [▼/▲] zum Ö󰀨nen des ausgewählten Menüs.
Menübetrieb
[▼/▲]: Option im Menü auswählen.
[◄/►]: Einstellung vornehmen oder Untermenü ö󰀨nen.
[OK]: Untermenü ö󰀨nen oder Einstellung bestätigen.
Menü verlassen
Drücken Sie die Taste [MENU], um zum vorherigen Menü zurückzukehren oder um das Menü zu
verlassen. Oder drücken Sie die Taste [EXIT], um das Menü zu verlassen.
Dieses Menü ist nur im TV-Modus verfügbar
SENDER
Sender-Menü
1� Automatische Sendersuche
Drücken Sie ▼/▲ zur Auswahl der automatischen Suche und bestätigen Sie mit OK/►.
2� Manuelle ATV-Sendersuche
Drücken Sie die Tasten ▼/▲ zur Auswahl der manuellen ATV-Sendersuche und drücken Sie OK,
um das Untermenü zu ö󰀨nen. Wählen Sie mit den Tasten ◄/► zur Auswahl von Sender und
drücken Sie OK, um Sender zu suchen.
3� Manuelle DTV-Sendersuche
Drücken Sie die Tasten ▼/▲ zur Auswahl der manuellen DTV-Sendersuche und drücken Sie
OK, um das Untermenü zu ö󰀨nen. Wählen Sie mit den Tasten ◄/► zur Auswahl von Sender und
drücken Sie OK, um Sender zu suchen.
4� Programm bearbeiten
Drücken Sie die Tasten ▼/▲ zur Auswahl von Programm bearbeiten und drücken Sie OK, um
das Untermenü zu ö󰀨nen.
5� Terminliste
Drücken Sie die Tasten ▼/▲ zur Auswahl von Terminliste und drücken Sie OK, um das
Untermenü zu ö󰀨nen. Es ist für die Quelle verfügbar.
6� Signalinformationen
Drücken Sie die Tasten ▼/▲ zur Auswahl von Signalinformationen und drücken Sie OK, um detaillierte
Informationen über das Signal anzuzeigen� Nur verfügbar, wenn ein DTV-Signal vorhanden ist�
7� CI-Daten
Drücken Sie die Tasten ▼/▲ zur Auswahl von CI-Daten und drücken Sie OK, um das Untermenü
zu ö󰀨nen.
14
Deutsch
BILD Einstellbare Optionen können je nach Signalquelle variieren. Die
Funktionen einer gleichen Option sind jedoch immer gleich.
Bild-Menü
1. Bildeinstellungen
Drücken Sie die Tasten ▼/▲ zur Auswahl von Bildeinstellung und drücken Sie OK, um das
Untermenü zu ö󰀨nen. Im persönlichen Bildmodus können Sie die Werte für Kontrast, Helligkeit,
Farbe, Bildschärfe und Farbton ändern�
2. Kontrast / Helligkeit / Farbe / Farbton / Bildschärfe
Diese Einstellungen können nur konguriert werden, wenn Sie Persönlich als Bildmodus
auswählen�
Drücken Sie die Tasten ▼/▲ zur Auswahl der Option und ändern Sie die Einstellung mit den
Tasten ◄/►.
3. Farbtemperatur
Drücken Sie die Tasten ▼/▲ zur Auswahl von Farbtemperatur und drücken Sie OK, um das
Untermenü zu ö󰀨nen.
Drücken Sie ▼/▲ zur Auswahl. (Verfügbarer Bildmodus: Kalt, Normal, Warm).
4. Rauschunterdrückung
Um Bildstörungen herauszultern und zu reduzieren und um die Bildqualität zu verbessern.
Drücken Sie die Tasten ▼/▲ zur Auswahl von Rauschunterdrückung und drücken Sie OK, um
das Untermenü zu ö󰀨nen.
5. HDMI-Modus
Drücken Sie die Tasten ▼/▲ zur Auswahl von HDMI-Modus und drücken Sie OK, um das
Untermenü zu ö󰀨nen.
SOUND
Sound-Menü
1. Soundmodus
Wählen Sie den von Ihnen bevorzugten Ton-Modus aus� Die Einstellungen für Treble und Bass
sind nur im Modus Persönlich verfügbar; ändern Sie die Einstellung nach Belieben�
2. Höhen/Bässe
Drücken Sie die Tasten ▼/▲ zur Auswahl der Option und ändern Sie mit den Tasten ◄/► die
Einstellungen�
3. Balance
Drücken Sie die Tasten ▼/▲ zur Auswahl der Option und ändern Sie mit den Tasten ◄/► die
Einstellungen�
4. Automatische Lautstärke
Drücken Sie die Tasten ▼/▲ zur Auswahl von Automatischer Lautstärke und drücken Sie OK zur
Auswahl von Ein oder Aus�
5. SPDIF-Modus
Drücken Sie die Tasten ▼/▲ zur Auswahl von SPDIF-Modus und drücken Sie OK zur Auswahl
von Aus/PCM/Automatisch.
6. Audio Delay (AV-Synchronität)
Drücken Sie die Tasten ▼/▲ zur Auswahl der Option und ändern Sie mit den Tasten ◄/► die
Einstellungen�
7. Audiobeschreibung
Drücken Sie die Tasten ▼/▲ zur Auswahl von Audiobeschreibung und drücken Sie OK zu
Auswahl von Ein oder Aus� Die Funktion ist für blinde Personen; die Inhalte der aktuellen
Bildschirmanzeige werden über eine zusätzliche Tonspur erläutert, sofern diese gesendet wird�
8Menübetrieb
15
Deutsch
Menübetrieb 8
ZEIT
Zeit-Menü
1. Uhrzeit
Drücken Sie die Tasten ▼/▲ zur Auswahl von: Datum / Monat / Jahr / Stunde / Minute.
Drücken Sie ▼/▲ zum Einstellen der Uhrzeit.
2. Zeitzone
Drücken Sie die Tasten ▼/▲ zur Auswahl von Zeitzone und drücken Sie OK, um das Untermenü
zu ö󰀨nen.
3. Sleep-Timer
Wählen Sie die Dauer in Minuten, nach Ablauf derer sich der Fernseher automatisch ausschaltet�
Deaktivieren Sie diese Funktion durch Auswahl der Einstellung Aus�
4. Auto Standby
Drücken Sie die Tasten ▼/▲ zur Auswahl von Auto Standby und drücken Sie OK, um das
Untermenü zu ö󰀨nen.
Wenn in der vorgegebenen Dauer keine Eingabe über die Fernbedienung erfolgt, wird das Gerät
automatisch ausgeschaltet� Falls Sie eine Funktion ausführen, wird die Dauer dieses Zeitraums
zurückgesetzt�
5. OSD-Timer
Drücken Sie die Tasten ▼/▲ zur Auswahl von OSD-Timer und drücken Sie OK, um das
Untermenü zu ö󰀨nen.
HINWEIS:
Die Uhrzeit ändert sich je nach der von Ihnen eingestellten Zeitzone�
SPERRE
Sperren-Menü
1. Systemsperre
Drücken Sie die Tasten ▼/▲ zur Auswahl von Systemsperre und drücken Sie OK, um eine der
folgenden 3 Optionen zu aktivieren. 0000 ist das werksseitige Passwort. Falls Sie das Passwort
vergessen, wenden Sie sich an den Kundendienst�
2. Passwort vergeben
Drücken Sie die Tasten ▼/▲ zur Auswahl von Passwort setzen und drücken Sie OK, um das
Untermenü für die Einrichtung eines neuen Passworts zu ö󰀨nen.
3. Sendersperre
Drücken Sie die Tasten ▼/▲ zur Auswahl von Sendersperre und drücken Sie OK, um das
Untermenü zu ö󰀨nen. Drücken Sie die grüne Taste, um den Sender zu sperren oder zu entsperren.
4. Jugendschutz
Drücken Sie die Tasten ▼/▲ zur Auswahl von Jugendschutz und drücken Sie OK, um das
Untermenü zu ö󰀨nen. Dort können Sie die für Ihre Kinder geeignete Alterseinstellung auswählen.
5. Tastensperre
Drücken Sie ▼/▲ zur Auswahl von Tastensperre und drücken Sie dann ◄/► zur Auswahl von
Ein oder Aus�
Wenn die Tastensperre aktiviert ist, können Sie die Tasten auf dem Bedienfeld nicht mehr verwenden�
6. Hotelmodus
Drücken Sie die Tasten ▼/▲ zur Auswahl von Hotelmodus und drücken Sie OK, um die Option
Ein oder Aus auszuwählen�
16
Deutsch
Menübetrieb
8
SETUP
Setup-Menü
1. Sprache
Anzeigesprache auswählen�
2. Videotext Zeichensatz
Drücken Sie die Tasten ▼/▲ zur Auswahl von Videotext Zeichensatz und drücken Sie OK, um
das Untermenü zu ö󰀨nen.
3. Audiosprachen
Drücken Sie die Tasten ▼/▲ zur Auswahl von Audiosprache und drücken Sie OK, um das
Untermenü zu ö󰀨nen.
4. Untertitelsprache
Drücken Sie die Tasten ▼/▲ zur Auswahl von Untertitelsprache und drücken Sie OK, um das
Untermenü zu ö󰀨nen.
5. Gehörlosenhilfe
Drücken Sie ▼/▲ zur Auswahl der Option Gehörlosenhilfe und drücken Sie dann ◄/► zur
Auswahl von Ein oder Aus�
6. PVR-Dateisystem
Drücken Sie die Tasten ▼/▲ zur Auswahl von PVR-Dateisystem und drücken Sie OK, um das
Untermenü zu ö󰀨nen.
Drücken Sie die Tasten ▼/▲ zur Auswahl von PVR-Dateisystem überprüfen und drücken Sie OK
zum Bestätigen. Die USB-Geschwindigkeit wird getestet.
7. Bildformat
Bildformat einstellen in dem das Bild des TV-Programms dargestellt werden soll�
8. Blauer Bildschirm
Drücken Sie ▼/▲ zur Auswahl der Option blauer Bildschirm und drücken Sie dann ◄/► zur
Auswahl von Ein oder Aus�
9. Erstinstallation
Drücken Sie die Tasten ▼/▲ zur Auswahl von Erstinstallation und drücken Sie OK zum
Bestätigen�
10. Werkseinstellungen wiederherstellen
Drücken Sie die Tasten ▼/▲ zur Auswahl von Werkseinstellungen wiederherstellen, drücken Sie
OK und bestätigen Sie anschließend die erscheinende Abfrage mit ◄.
11. Software Update (USB)
Drücken Sie ▼/▲ zur Auswahl von Software Update (USB). Schließen Sie Ihr USB-Gerät an den
USB-Port an und drücken Sie OK, um die Software zu aktualisieren.
12. Energiemodus
Drücken Sie ▼/▲ zur Auswahl von Umgebung und wählen Sie dann mit den Tasten ◄/► den
Heim-Modus oder den Vorführ-Modus�
13. HDMI CEC
Drücken Sie die Tasten ▼/▲ zur Auswahl von HDMI CEC und drücken Sie OK, um das
Untermenü zu ö󰀨nen.
17
Deutsch
Multimedia 9
Hinweis: Schließen Sie vor der Verwendung der Medienfunktionen Ihr USB-Gerät an. Drücken
Sie dann die Taste SOURCE, um die Option Media als Eingangsquelle auszuwählen.
Drücken Sie die Tasten ▼/▲ zur Auswahl von Media als Eingangsquelle und bestätigen Sie mit OK
Warten Sie, bis der Fernseher das USB-Speichergerät erkannt hat und drücken Sie dann die
Taste ◄ oder ► zur Auswahl von Foto / Musik / Film / Text und drücken Sie OK zum Ö󰀨nen der
Option. Die Funktionen für Foto / Musik / Film / Text sind gleich.
jlbhd.jpg
Pause
Info.
jlbhd.jpg
Play
Play
Aa
Char Set 1
Time 14:30:58
Date Fri Mar 14, 2014
-----------------------------------
-----------------------------------
------
-----------------------------------
-----------------------------------
------
Music Playlist
Aa
Char Set
Previous P...
1� Drücken Sie ◄ oder ►, um ggf. einen Unterordner zu ö󰀨nen, und drücken Sie dann OK zum
Ö󰀨nen des Ordners. Drücken Sie OK, um die Wiedergabe zu starten. Drücken Sie die Beenden-
Taste, um zurückzukehren. Drücken Sie OK, um den übergeordneten Ordner auszuwählen und
zum vorherigen Menü zurückzukehren. Drücken Sie ◄ oder ► zum Umblättern von Seiten.
2� Drücken Sie ►, um die Wiedergabe zu starten oder zu unterbrechen� Drücken Sie , um
die Wiedergabe zu beenden�
3� Drücken Sie , um zur vorhergehenden Datei zurückzukehren� Drücken Sie , um zur
nächsten Datei zu gelangen�
18
Deutsch
Hinweise für die Verwendung von USB-Geräten
MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) wird nicht unterstützt.
Max. HDD-Kapazität: 500GB.
Dieses Gerät unterstützt nur USB-Flashgeräte des Formats FAT32. Dieser Fernseher garantiert
nicht die Wiedergabe von USB-Flashgeräten anderer Formate (wie z.B. FAT16 oder NTFS).
Einige Arten von digitalen USB-Kameras, Audiogeräten oder Kartenleser sind möglicherweise
nicht mit diesem Fernseher kompatibel�
Falls ein USB-Gerät viel Energie benötigt (mehr als 500mA oder 5V), wird dieses USB-Gerät
möglicherweise nicht unterstützt�
Dieser Fernseher unterstützt keine USB-Geräte mit mehreren Partitionen.
Schließen Sie das USB-Gerät direkt an den USB-Port des Fernsehers an. Falls Sie ein separates
Kabel oder einen USB-Hub für die Verbindung verwenden, können Kompatibilitätsprobleme
auftreten�
Sichern Sie vor dem Anschluss eines USB-Geräts alle Daten, um Schäden oder Datenverluste
zu vermeiden� Sie tragen das Risiko für Dateischäden oder Datenverluste�
Je höher die Auösung des Bildes, desto länger dauert es, bis das Bild angezeigt wird.
Je nach USB-Gerät kann es unterschiedlich lang dauern, bis der Fernseher das Gerät vollständig
initialisiert hat�
Falls Dateien nicht unterstützt werden oder beschädigt sind, erscheint die Mitteilung „unsupported
File (Datei nicht unterstützt)“.
MP3-Dateien mit DRM, die von einer kostenpichtigen Seite heruntergeladen wurden, können
nicht abgespielt werden. Digital Rights Management (DRM) ist eine Technologie, die die
Erstellung von Inhalten und den Vertrieb und die Verwaltung auf eine integrierte und umfassende
Art und Weise unterstützt, einschließlich des Schutzes von Rechten und Interessen der Anbieter
dieser Inhalte, der Prävention der illegalen Vervielfältigung der Inhalte, sowie die Verwaltung der
Rechnungsstellung und Bezahlung�
Falls Sie ein Foto verschieben, kann es einige Sekunden dauern, bis das Bild geladen wird� Zu
diesem Zeitpunkt erscheint das Laden-Icon auf dem Bildschirm�
Falls ein USB-Gerät nicht ordnungsgemäß funktioniert, trennen und verbinden Sie es erneut.
Prüfen Sie, ob das USB-Gerät ordnungsgemäß mit Ihrem PC funktioniert.
TYP FORMAT DATEIENDUNG
Bild JPEG .jpg, .jpeg
BMP .bmp
Audio MP3 .mp3
Video MP4 .mp4
MPG .mpg
9Multimedia
19
Deutsch
Fehlerbehebung 10
Bevor Sie sich mit dem Kundendienst in Verbindung setzen, lesen Sie bitte zunächst die
nachfolgende Tabelle zur Störbehebung durch� Falls dann immer noch Probleme auftreten,
trennen Sie den Fernseher vom Netzstrom und kontaktieren Sie den Kundendienst�
Problem Mögliche Abhilfe
Kein Bild, kein Ton Überprüfen Sie, ob die Stromversorgung zum Fernseher
gegeben ist�
Überprüfen Sie die Verbindung des Netzkabels und/oder anderer
Kabel�
Bild normal, kein Ton Überprüfen Sie die Lautstärkeeinstellung�
Überprüfen Sie, ob die Taste
Select “Auto Adjust“ to adjust the image.
gedrückt wurde�
Überprüfen Sie die Verbindung des externen Gerätes.
Schlechte oder keine
Farbe, Ton vorhanden
Überprüfen Sie die Einstellungen für „Helligkeit“ und „Kontrast“ im
BILD-Menü�
Doppelbilder/-konturen,
Ton vorhanden
Überprüfen Sie die Verbindung und die Ausrichtung der Antenne�
TV-Sender feineinstellen�
Überprüfen Sie die Verbindung des externen Geräts.
Die Rundfunkanstalt hat möglicherweise Übertragungsprobleme�
Versuchen Sie, einen anderen Sender einzuschalten�
Schnee im Bild, schlechter
Ton
Überprüfen Sie die Verbindung und die Ausrichtung der Antenne�
Die Rundfunkanstalt hat möglicherweise Übertragungsprobleme�
Versuchen Sie, einen anderen Sender einzuschalten�
Periodische Störungen Entfernen Sie elektrische Geräte aus der Umgebung des Fernsehers.
Schlechter Stereoton Die Rundfunkanstalt hat möglicherweise Übertragungsprobleme�
Versuchen Sie, Mono einzuschalten�
Die Fernbedienung
funktioniert nicht�
Überprüfen Sie, ob die Batterien richtig eingelegt sind�
Möglicherweise sind die Batterien leer� Ersetzen Sie die Batterien
durch neue�
Entfernen Sie alle Hindernisse zwischen der Fernbedienung und
dem Infrarotempfänger des Fernsehers�
Vergewissern Sie sich, dass der Infrarotempfänger des
Fernsehers keinen starken Lichtquellen ausgesetzt ist�
Kein Signal“ erscheint auf
dem Bildschirm�
Der Fernseher empfängt kein Signal über die Eingänge�
Überprüfen Sie, ob die Empfangskabel richtig angeschlossen sind�
Überprüfen Sie, ob die externen Geräte eingeschaltet sind.
Die Anzeige Kein Signal
oder „Unsupported
Signal“ erscheint
(nur im RGB-Modus)
Überprüfen Sie, ob die Displayauösung oder Displayfrequenz
Ihres PCs vom Fernseher unterstützt werden. Siehe Übersicht
mit empfohlenen RGB-Eingangssignalen.
Bild nicht mittig
ausgerichtet
(nur im PC-Modus)
Wählen Sie „Automatisch einstellen“, um das Bild auszurichten.
20
Deutsch
Technische Daten
11
Modell 24 32 43
Größe LCD-Panel
(LED-Hinterleuchtung) 23,8" 32" 43"
Native Auösung 1920 × 1080 1920 × 1080 1920 × 1080
Videosysteme (RF) PAL, SECAM PAL, SECAM PAL, SECAM
Tonsystem (RF) D/K, I , BG D/K, I , BG D/K, I , BG
Integrierte Lautsprecher 2,5W x 2 6W x 2 8W x 2
Energieverbrauch
Standby-Modus ≤0,50 W ≤0,50 W ≤0,50 W
Stromversorgung Siehe Typenschild Siehe Typenschild Siehe Typenschild
Energieverbrauch Siehe Typenschild Siehe Typenschild Siehe Typenschild
Unterstützte Signale
YPbPr VGA HDMI(DVI)
480i 640X480 480i
576i 800X600 576i
480p 1024X768 480p
576p 1366X768 576p
720p 1920X1080 720p
1080i 1080i
1080p 1080p
HINWEIS: Design und technische Daten unterliegen unangekündigten Änderungen.
Entsorgung
Packaging
The product has been packaged to protect it from damage in transit. The packaging is made
of materials that can be recycled in an environmentally friendly manner.
Device
Old devices should not be disposed of with the normal household rubbish. In accordance
with Directive 2012/19/EU, the device must be properly disposed of at the end of its service
life. This involves separating the materials in the device for the purpose of recycling and pre-
venting any impact on the environment. Take old devices to a collection point for electrical
scrap or a recycling centre. Contact your local waste disposal company or your local authori-
ty for more information on this subject.
Batteries
Do not dispose of used batteries in the household rubbish! They should be taken to a collec-
tion point for used batteries.
Verpackung
Das Produkt wurde so verpackt, dass es vor Schäden während des Transportes
geschützt ist� Die Verpackung besteht aus Materialien, die umweltfreundlich recycelt
werden können�
Packaging
The product has been packaged to protect it from damage in transit. The packaging is made
of materials that can be recycled in an environmentally friendly manner.
Device
Old devices should not be disposed of with the normal household rubbish. In accordance
with Directive 2012/19/EU, the device must be properly disposed of at the end of its service
life. This involves separating the materials in the device for the purpose of recycling and pre-
venting any impact on the environment. Take old devices to a collection point for electrical
scrap or a recycling centre. Contact your local waste disposal company or your local authori-
ty for more information on this subject.
Batteries
Do not dispose of used batteries in the household rubbish! They should be taken to a collec-
tion point for used batteries.
Gerät
Entsorgen Sie das alte Gerät nicht über den Hausmüll. Gemäß Richtlinie 2012/19/EU
muss das Gerät am Ende seiner Lebensdauer ordnungsgemäß entsorgt werden. Die
Materialien des Gerätes müssen für das Recycling und zum Schutz der Umwelt getrennt
werden. Bringen Sie alte Geräte an eine Sammelstelle für elektrischen Schrott oder in
eine Annahmestelle für das Recycling� Weitere Informationen erhalten Sie von Ihrem
örtlichen Entsorgungsunternehmen oder Ihrer Behörde vor Ort.
Packaging
The product has been packaged to protect it from damage in transit. The packaging is made
of materials that can be recycled in an environmentally friendly manner.
Device
Old devices should not be disposed of with the normal household rubbish. In accordance
with Directive 2012/19/EU, the device must be properly disposed of at the end of its service
life. This involves separating the materials in the device for the purpose of recycling and pre-
venting any impact on the environment. Take old devices to a collection point for electrical
scrap or a recycling centre. Contact your local waste disposal company or your local authori-
ty for more information on this subject.
Batteries
Do not dispose of used batteries in the household rubbish! They should be taken to a collec-
tion point for used batteries.
Batterien
Entsorgen Sie Batterien nicht über den Hausmüll! Bringen Sie diese zu einer
Sammelstelle für Altbatterien�
1
English
1. Important Safety Information
Caution..............................................................................................................................2
2. Installing the LED TV
Accessories ....................................................................................................................4
Installing the Stand...........................................................................................................5
Mounting on a wall.............................................................................................................5
3. Overview of the TV set
Parts and buttons .............................................................................................................6
4. Antenna Connection...........................................................................................7
5. Connect External Devices..................................................................................8
6. Using the Remote Control
Inserting Remote Control Batteries................................................................................ ..9
Operating the Remote Control ....................................................................................... ..9
Using the Remote Control ............................................................................................. 10
7. Basic operation of the TV
Turning the TV On and O󰀨 ............................................................................................. 11
First Time Setup ............................................................................................................. 11
Auto Tuning Status ........................................................................................................ 11
Changing Channels ....................................................................................................... 11
Adjusting the Volume ..................................................................................................... 12
Selecting the Input Source ............................................................................................. 12
Contents
8. Menu Operation
Channel Menu ............................................................................................................... 13
Picture Menu .................................................................................................................. 14
Sound Menu................................................................................................................... 14
Time Menu ..................................................................................................................... 15
Lock Menu ..................................................................................................................... 15
Setup Menu.................................................................................................................... 16
9. Multimedia ............................................................................................................... 17
10. Troubleshooting................................................................................................... 19
11. Specication ......................................................................................................... 20
12. Disposal ............................................................................................................... 20
2
English
Dangerous Voltage: The lightning ash with arrowhead symbol, within an equi-
lateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of dangerous voltage
within the inside of the product that may be su󰀩cient level to constitute a risk of
electric shock to persons.
Instruction:
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user
to the presence of important operating and servicing instructions in the literature
accompanying the appliance.
Safety:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK DO NOT REMOVE COVER
(OR BACK). NO USER SERVICEABLEPARTS ARE INSIDE. REFER TO QUALI-
FIED PERSONNEL ONLY.
Caution
Important Safety Information
1
1.Read these instructions.
2.Keep these instructions.
3.Heed all warnings.
4.Follow all instructions.
5.Do not use Television near water.
6.Clean only with dry cloth.
7.Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions.
8.Do not install near by any heat source such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other
apparatus (including ampliers) that produce heat.
9.Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience
receptacles and the point where they exit from the apparatus.
10.Only use attachments/accessories specied by the manufacturer.
11.Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specied by the manufacturer, or sold
paratus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to
tip-over.
12. Unplug Television during lightning storms or when it is unused for long periods of time.
13. Refer all servicing to qualied service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus
has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been
spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus. the apparatus has been exposed to rain or
moisture and does not operate normally, or has been dropped.
14. WARNING:To Reduce The Risk Of Fire Or Electric Shock, Do Not Expose Television To Rain
Or Moisture.
15. Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and no objects lled with liquids,
such as vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.
16. The mains plug or appliance coupler shall remain readily operable.
17. Use in outdoor: This TV is not designed for outdoors installation. Do not expose Television to
rain, as it may result in re or electric shock. Also, do not expose Television to direct sunlight, as
it may heat up and become damaged.
3
English
Important Safety Information 1
WARNING!
Never place a television set in an unstable location. A television set may fall, causing serious
personal injury or death. Many injuries, particularly to children, can be avoided by taking simple
precautions such as:
*Using cabinets or stands recommended by the manufacturer of the television set.
*Only using furniture that can safely support the television set.
*Ensuring the television set is not overhanging the edge of the supporting furniture.
*Not placing the television set on tall furniture (for example, cupboards or bookcases) without
anchoring both the furniture and the television set to a suitable support.
*Not placing the television set on cloth or other materials that may be located between the
television set and supporting furniture.
*Educating children about the dangers of climbing on furniture to reach the television set or its
controls.
If your existing television set is being retained and relocated, the same considerations as above
should be applied.
Service Information see last page!
Caution
4
English
1
Please make sure the following items are included with your LED TV.
If any items are missing, please contact your dealer.
Remote Control 2 batteries Installation instruction
LED TV
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/- -
TIMESHIFT
LIST
Accessories
Mini AV cable
Mini YPbPr cable
Installing the LED TV
5
English
2
Installing the LED TV
Attaching the Stand
6
English
Overview of the TV set3
Parts and buttons
Item Description
1 / POWER Switch the TV on/standby.
2SOURCE Select input source.
3MENU Switch OSD menu ON/OFF.
4 + CH - Channel up/down when source is TV, or select a control while in OSD
menu.
5+ VOL - Increase / Decrease sound volume or adjust a highlighted control while in
OSD menu.
MAKING CONNECTIONS
Connect various external devices to the TV
and switch input modes to select an external
device. For more information of external devices
connection, refer to the manual provided with
each device.
Available external devices are: HD receivers,
DVD players, audio systems, USB
storage devices, PC, and other external
devices.
NOTE
yThe external device connection may differ
from the model.
yConnect external devices to the TV
regardless of the order of the TV port.
yRefer to the external equipments manual
for operating instructions.
yIn PC mode, there may be noise
associated with the resolution, vertical
pattern, contrast or brightness. If noise is
present, change the PC output to another
resolution, change the refresh rate to
another rate or adjust the brightness and
contrast on the PICTURE menu until the
picture is clear.
yIn PC mode, some resolution settings
may not work properly depending on the
graphics card.
Connect the TV to a wall antenna socket with an
RF cable (75 ).
NOTE
yUse a signal splitter to use more than 2
TVs.
yIf the image quality is poor, install a signal
amplifier properly to improve the image
quality.
yIf the image quality is poor with an
antenna connected, try to realign the
antenna in the correct direction.
yAn antenna cable and converter are not
supplied.
ySupported DTV Audio: MPEG, Dolby
Digital.
Antenna connection
SAT/LNB
AERIAL/
CABLE
7
English
Antenna connection 4
MAKING CONNECTIONS
Connect various external devices to the TV
and switch input modes to select an external
device. For more information of external device’s
connection, refer to the manual provided with
each device.
Available external devices are: HD receivers,
DVD players, audio systems, USB
storage devices, PC, and other external
devices.
NOTE
yThe external device connection may differ
from the model.
yConnect external devices to the TV
regardless of the order of the TV port.
yRefer to the external equipment’s manual
for operating instructions.
yIn PC mode, there may be noise
associated with the resolution, vertical
pattern, contrast or brightness. If noise is
present, change the PC output to another
resolution, change the refresh rate to
another rate or adjust the brightness and
contrast on the PICTURE menu until the
picture is clear.
yIn PC mode, some resolution settings
may not work properly depending on the
graphics card.
Connect the TV to a wall antenna socket with an
RF cable (75 ).
NOTE
yUse a signal splitter to use more than 2
TVs.
yIf the image quality is poor, install a signal
amplifier properly to improve the image
quality.
yIf the image quality is poor with an
antenna connected, try to realign the
antenna in the correct direction.
yAn antenna cable and converter are not
supplied.
ySupported DTV Audio: MPEG, Dolby
Digital.
Antenna connection
SAT/LNB
AERIAL/
CABLE
8
English
Connect External Devices
5
CamcorderDVD playerPC (HDMI-output)Blu-ray disc playerAudio system
DVD player with
component output Headphone
USB
ARCSCART
TV
CI SLOT
The sound
system
HDMI1(ARC)
AERIAL/CABLESAT/LNB
VGA IN PC AUDIO IN
USB EARPHONE
HDMI2 HDMI3
MINI AV IN
MINI
YPBPR IN S/PDIF OUT
CI SLOT
SCART IN
9
English
Using the Remote Control 6
30 30
IR Receiver
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
Operating the Remote Control
1 .Aim Remote Control directly at the
Remote Control Sensor on the left
down corner of the TV set.
2 .Remote Control range is at approx.
10 meters with angles of approx.30 degree.
3. Avoid obstructions between the
Remote Control and the sensor.
☼If you do not intent to use the remote control
for a long time, remove the batteries.
☼If the remote control does not operate
correctly, or if the operating range .
reduced,replace both batteries with new ones.
Inserting Remote Control Batteries
1. Remove the battery cover by pulling then lifting the knob on the cover.
2. Insert the batteries, corresponding to the (+) and (-) markings on the battery compartment.
3. Reattach the battery cover.
CAUTION
• Only use the specied AAA batteries.
• Do not mix new and old batteries. This may result in creaking or leakage, which may pose a
risk of re or lead to personal injury.
• Insert batteries according to (+) and (-) markings. Inserting the batteries incorrectly may result
in leakage, which may pose a risk of re or lead to personal injury.
• Dispose of the battery in accordance with local laws and regulations.
• Keep the batteries away from children or pets.
• When the remote control will not be used for an extended period, remove the batteries.
10
English
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
Using the Remote Control
6
11
English
Press the POWER button on the remote control.
You can also use the Power button at the bottom/side of
the panel.
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
MENU EXIT
FREEZE
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
*If there is no input signal within 15 minutes, TV will be
turned o󰀨 automatically.
Basic Operation of the TV 7
Turning the TV On and O󰀨
First Time Setup
Connect an RF cable from the TV’s input called “RF-In” and to your TV Aerial socket.
Select Language
Press ◄ / ► button to select the language to be used for menus and message.
Select Country
Press ▼ / ▲ button to highlight country menu.
Press ◄ / ► button to select the country you want to.
OK
Germany
Environment
Digital Type
Home Mode
DVB-T
Auto Tuning Status
For tuning ATV, press Menu and left arrow button to skip ATV tuning, for tuning DTV, press
Menu and left arrow button to skip DTV tuning.
Thailand
OK
1. Using Channel Buttons
Press +CH- button to change channels, and the TV
changes channels in sequence. You will see all channels
that have been memorized. Channels erased or not
memorized will not be shown.
* Return to the previous channel, press button.
Changing Channels
+
SOURCE
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
LIST
12
English
Press + VOL - to adjust volume.
To turn o󰀨 the volume, press MUTE.
To restore volume, press MUTE again, or press
VOL + directly.
To select the TV or other external input sources connected to
the TV.
1. Press Source button to display the input source list.
2. Press / or SOURCE button to select the input source
you want to.(Satellite, DTV, ATV, AV, PC, SCART, Component,
HDMI, Media )
3. Press OK button to enter the input source,
4. Press EXIT button to quit.
Basic Operation of the TV
7
Adjusting the Volume
Selecting the Input Source
+
SOURCE
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
LIST
OK
HDMI3
13
English
Menu Operation 8
1.Auto Tuning
Press ▼ / ▲ button to select Auto Tuning, then press OK/► button to enter.
2.ATV Manual Tuning
Press ▼ / ▲ button to select ATV Manual Tuning, then press OK button to enter sub-menu.
Press ◄ / ► button to select channel, then press OK button to search program.
3.DTV Manual Tuning
Press ▼ / ▲ button to select DTV Manual Tuning, then press OK button to enter sub-menu.
Press ◄ / ► button to select channel, then press OK button to search program.
4.Programe Edit
Press ▼ / ▲ button to select Programe Edit, then press OK button to enter sub-menu.
5.Schedule List
Press ▼ / ▲ button to select Schedule List, then press OK button to enter sub-menu. It is
available in source.
6.Signal Information
Press ▼ / ▲ button to select Signal Information, press the OK button to see the detail
information about the signal. Only available when there is signal in DTV.
7.CI Information
Press ▼ / ▲ button to select CI Information, then press OK button to enter sub-menu.
• The following steps need to be used in the settings of menu in the later chapters.
Please keep the operations in mind.
• The instructions and diagrams of the menu setting are usually made in the TV
signal source. Exceptions will be noted separately.
• Some items are not adjustable in di󰀨erent signal sources.
Enter Menu
Press [MENU] button to display the main menu.
Press [◄ / ►] button to select menu that you want in the main menu.
Press [ OK ] or [▼ / ▲] button to enter menu.
Menu Operation
[▼ / ▲] : Select the option that you want to adjust in the menu.
[◄ / ►]: Adjust or enter the sub menu.
[ OK ]:Enter the sub menu or conrm.
Exit Menu
Press [MENU] button to return to the previous menu or exit menu;
or press [EXIT] buttonto exit menu.
14
English
1.Picture Mode
Press ▼ / ▲ button to select Picture Mode, then press OK button to enter sub-menu.You can
change the value of contrast, brightness, colour, sharpness and tint when the picture is in
Personal mode.
2.Contrast/ Brightness/ Colour/ Tint / Sharpness
These settings can only be adjusted when the Picture Mode is set to User.
Press ▼ / ▲ button to select option, then press ◄ / ► button to adjust.
3.Colour Temp
Press ▼ / ▲ button to select Colour Temp , then press OK button to enter sub-menu.
Press ▼ / ▲button to select. (Available Picture mode: Cold, Normal, Warm).
4.Noise Reduction
To filter out and reduce the image noise and improve picture quality.
Press ▼ / ▲ button to select Noise Reduction, then press OK button to enter sub-menu.
5.HDMI Mode
Press ▼ / ▲ button to select HDMI Mode , then press OK button to enter sub-menu.
1.Sound Mode
Select the sound mode that you feel comfortable with.The value of Treble and Bass are only
available in User mode,you can adjust them as you like.
2.Treble/Bass
Press ▼ / ▲ button to select option, Press ◄ / ► button to adjust.
The treble and bass are only available in User mode,you can adjust them as you like.
3.Balance
Press ▼ / ▲ button to select option, Press ◄ / ► button to adjust.
4.Auto Volume Level
Press ▼ / ▲ button to select Auto Volume Level, then press OK button to select On or Off.
5.SPDIF Mode
Press ▼ / ▲ button to select SPDIF Mode, then press OK button to select Off / PCM / Auto.
6.AD Switch
Press ▼ / ▲ button to select AD Switch, then press OK button to select On or Off. Amblyopia
function for the blind, the tracks will be mixed describe the current screen . It needs coldstream
to support.
NOTE:
Balance:This item can adjust the speaker’s output, it enables you to listen to best at your position.
Auto Volume: This item is used for reducing the difference between channel and program’s
volume
automatically.
8 Menu Operation
15
English
Menu Operation 8
1.Clock
Press ▼ / ▲ button to select:Date/Month/Year/Hour/Minute.
Press ▼ / ▲ button to set up clock.
2.Time Zone
Press ▼ / ▲ button to select Time Zone, then press OK button to enter sub-menu.
3.Sleep Timer
Select the time in minutes that you want the TV to shut off automatically. Cancel it by setting it to
Off.
4.Auto Standby
Press ▼ / ▲ button to select Auto Standby, then press OK button to enter sub-menu.
The remote control does not make any operation in the hypothesis time, it will close down
automatically. If you do any operation, it will reset the time.
5.OSD Timer
Press ▼ / ▲ button to select OSD Timer, then press OK button to enter sub-menu.
NOTE:
The Clock will change with the area which you have selected in the Time Zone.
1.System Lock
Press ▼ / ▲ button to select System Lock, then press OK button to make the following 3 options
valid. Default password is 0000, and if forget what you set, please call the service center.
2.Set Password
Press ▼ / ▲ button to select Set Password, then press OK button to enter sub-menu to set new
password.
3.Channel Lock
Press ▼ / ▲ button to select Channel Lockthen press OK button to enter sub-menu to select.
Press Green button to lock or unlock the channel.
4.Parental Guidance
Press ▼ / ▲ button to select Parental Guidance, then press OK button to enter sub-menu to
select the number of age which is suitable for your children.
5.Key Lock
Press ▼ / ▲ button to select Key Lock, then press ◄ / ► button to select On or Off.
When Key Lock’s statue is on, you can’t use the Key panel button.
6.Hotel Mode
Press ▼ / ▲ button to select Hotel Mode, then press OK button to select On or Off.
16
English
Menu Operation
8
1.Language
Set the display language.
2.TT Language
Press ▼ / ▲ button to select TT Language, then press OK button to enter sub-menu.
3.Audio Languages
Press ▼ / ▲ button to select Audio Languages, then press OK button to enter sub-menu.
4.Subtitle Language
Press ▼ / ▲ button to select Subtitle Language, then press OK button to enter sub-menu.
5.Hearing Impaired
Press ▼ / ▲ button to select Hearing Impaired, then press ◄ / ► button to select On or Off.
6.PVR File System
Press ▼ / ▲ button to select PVR File System, then press OK button to enter sub-menu.
Press ▼ / ▲ button to select Check PVR File System , Then press OK button to enter.
Then it will check the USB speed.
7.Aspect Ratio
Set the Aspect Ratio of the screen.
8.Blue Screen
Set the background color when there is no input signal to either blue or black.
9.First Time Installation
Press ▼ / ▲ button to select First time installation, then press OK button to enter.
10.Reset
Press ▼ / ▲ button to select Reset, then press OK button to enter sub-menu.
11.Software Update(USB)
Press ▼ / ▲ button to select Software Update (USB), plug your USB device in the USB slot,
then press OK button to update the right software.
12.HDMI CEC
Press ▼ / ▲ button to select HDMI CEC, then press OK button to enter the sub-menu.
13.Environment
Press ▼ / ▲ button to select Environment , then press ◄ / ► button to select Home Mode or
Shop Mode.
17
English
Multimedia 9
Note: Before operating Media menu,Plug in USB device, then press SOURCE button to
set the Input Source to Media .
Press ▼ / ▲ button to select Media in the Source menu, then press OK button to enter.
After television conrmed to recognize USB storage devices, press ◄ or ►button to select photo/
music/movie/text, and press OK button to enter photo/music/movie/text operation basic same.
1. Press ◄ or ► button to choose the sub-folder if necessary, then press OK to enter the folder. Press OK button
to play, press the exit button to return back. Press OK button to select the up folder, and return to the
previous level menu, press ◄ or ► buttons to turn pages.
2. Press button to start playback or pause. Press button to stop playback.
3. Press button to play to the last item. Press button to play to the next item.
jlbhd.jpg
Pause
Info.
jlbhd.jpg
Play
Play
Aa
Char Set 1
Time 14:30:58
Date Fri Mar 14, 2014
-----------------------------------
-----------------------------------
------
-----------------------------------
-----------------------------------
------
Music Playlist
Aa
Char Set
Previous P...
18
English
Precautions when using a USB device
• MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) is not supported.
• Max HDD capacity:500GB.
• This unit supports only USB Flash Drive with FAT32 format. This TV does not guarantee the
USB Flash Drive with other formats (such as FAT16 or NTFS).
• Certain types of USB Digital Camera and audio devices may not be compatible with this TV.
Media only guarantees to support USB Flash Drive. Other devices such as ash card reader,
USB HDD, USB Digital Camera and audio devices may not be compatible with this TV.
• If a USB device requires high power (more than 500mA or 5V), the USB device may not be
supported.
• This TV does not supported the USB device with multiple partitions.
• Please connect directly to the USB port of your TV. If you are using a separate cable connection
or through a USB hub, there may be a USB compatibility problem.
•Before connecting your device to the TV, please back up your les to prevent them from damage
or loss of data. Any data le damage or data loss is at your own risk.
•The higher the resolution of the image, the longer it takes to display on the screen.
• How fast a USB device is detected di󰀨ers from device to device.
• For unsupported or corrupted les, the "unsupported File" message is displayed.
• MP3 les with DRM that have been downloaded from a non-free site cannot be played. Digital
Rights Management (DRM) is a technology that supports the creation of content, the distribution
and management of the content in an integrated and comprehensive way, including the
protection of the rights and interests of the content providers, the prevention of the illegal
copying of contents, as well as managing billings and settlements.
• When moving to a photo, loading may take a few seconds. At this point, the loading icon will
appear on the screen.
• If USB card reader is connected, its volume may not be detected.
• If USB device does not function properly, please unplug and reconnect it.
• If verify whether the USB device is functioning properly with your PC.
9 Multimedia
TYPE CONTAINER FILE EXTENSION
Picture
gepj. , gpj.GEPJ
pmb.PMB
Audio
3pm.3PM
MP4
MPG
.mp4
.mpg
Video
19
English
Troubleshooting 10
Select “Auto Adjust“ to adjust the image.
20
English
Specication
11
Model 24 32 43
LED panel size (LED
Backlight) 23.8” 32” 43”
Native resolution 1920 × 1080 1920 × 1080 1920 × 1080
Video systems(RF) PAL , SECAM PAL , SECAM PAL , SECAM
Sound System(RF) D/K , I , BG D/K , I , BG D/K , I , BG
Built-in speakers 2.5W x 2 6W x 2 8W x 2
Standby Power
Consumption
0.50 W 0.50 W 0.50 W
Power supply
see back label see back label see back label
Power consumption
see back label see back label see back label
YPbPr VGA HDMI(DVI)
480i 640X480 480i
576i 800X600 576i
480P 1024X768 480P
576P 1366X768 576P
720P 1920X1080 720P
1080i 1080i
1080P 1080P
Supporting signals
NOTE:Design and specications are subject to change without notice.
Disposal
Packaging
The product has been packaged to protect it from damage in transit. The packaging is made
of materials that can be recycled in an environmentally friendly manner.
Device
Old devices should not be disposed of with the normal household rubbish. In accordance
with Directive 2012/19/EU, the device must be properly disposed of at the end of its service
life. This involves separating the materials in the device for the purpose of recycling and pre-
venting any impact on the environment. Take old devices to a collection point for electrical
scrap or a recycling centre. Contact your local waste disposal company or your local authori-
ty for more information on this subject.
Batteries
Do not dispose of used batteries in the household rubbish! They should be taken to a collec-
tion point for used batteries.
1
Polski
Spis treści
1. Ważne informacje dotyczące bezpieczeństwa ....................................................... 2
Ważne wskazówki ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������2
2. Instalacja telewizora ................................................................................................. 4
Akcesoria �����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������4
Montaż podstawy�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������5
3. Opis ogólny telewizora ............................................................................................. 6
Części i przyciski �����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������6
4. Podłączanie anteny ................................................................................................... 7
5. Podłączanie urządzeń zewnętrznych ...................................................................... 8
6. Korzystanie z pilota ................................................................................................. 9
Wkładanie baterii do pilota �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������9
Obsługa pilota zdalnego �����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������9
7. Podstawowa obsługa telewizora ........................................................................... 11
Włączanie i wyłączanie telewizora ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 11
Pierwsza konguracja�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 11
Stan strojenia automatycznego ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 11
Zmiana kanałów ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 11
Regulacja głośności�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������12
Wybór źródła sygnału wejściowego �����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������12
8. Obsługa menu ......................................................................................................... 13
Menu Kanału �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 13
Menu Obrazu �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 14
Menu Dźwięku ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 14
Menu Czasu ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 15
Menu Blokowania ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 15
Menu Konguracji ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 16
9. Multimedia ............................................................................................................... 17
10. Rozwiązywanie problemów .................................................................................... 19
11. Parametry techniczne ............................................................................................. 20
Sygnały wspomagające �����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������20
Utylizacja ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������20
2
Polski
Ważne informacje dotyczące bezpieczeństwa
1
Ważne wskazówki
1� Przeczytaj te instrukcje�
2� Zachowaj te instrukcje�
3� Stosuj się do wszystkich ostrzeżeń�
4� Postępuj zgodnie z instrukcjami�
5� Nie korzystaj z telewizora w pobliżu wody
6� Do czyszczenia używaj tylko suchej szmatki�
7� Nie zastawiaj otworów wentylacyjnych� Wykonaj instalację zgodnie z instrukcjami producenta�
8� Nie instaluj w pobliżu źródeł ciepła takich jak grzejniki, nawiewy, piece lub inne urządzenia
wytwarzające ciepło (w tym wzmacniacze)�
9� Zabezpiecz kabel zasilający tak, aby nie dało się na niego nadepnąć ani skręcić go – w
szczególności przy wtyczce, gnieździe i w miejscu jego wyjścia z urządzenia�
10� Używaj tylko nasadek/akcesoriów podanych przez producenta�
11� Używaj tylko z wózkiem, stojakiem, statywem, wspornikiem lub stołem określonym przez
producenta lub sprzedawanym wraz z urządzaniem� W przypadku zastosowania wózka
należy zachować ostrożność podczas przewożenia na nim urządzenia, tak aby uniknąć
wywrócenia�
12� Telewizor powinien zostać wyłączony na czas burzy z wyładowaniami atmosferycznymi lub w
przypadku, gdy nie jest używany przez dłuższy czas�
13� Wszelkie czynności serwisowe należy zlecać wykwalikowanemu personelowi serwisowemu�
Serwisowanie jest konieczne w przypadku wystąpienia jakiegokolwiek uszkodzenia
urządzenia, np� w przypadku uszkodzenia kabla zasilającego lub wtyczki, rozlania cieczy,
upuszczenia jakiegoś przedmiotu na urządzenie, upuszczenia samego urządzenia lub w
przypadku, gdy urządzenie zostało wystawione na działanie deszczu lub wilgoci i nie działa
poprawnie�
14� OSTRZEŻENIE: Aby zmniejszyć ryzyko pożaru i porażenia prądem elektrycznym, nie
wystawiaj telewizora na działanie deszczu ani wilgoci�
15� Nie wolno narażać urządzenia na ryzyko kontaktu z kapiącą lub tryskającą cieczą oraz nie
wolno umieszczać na urządzeniu żadnych przedmiotów wypełnionych cieczą (np� wazonów)�
16� Należy zapewnić łatwy dostęp do wtyczki lub złącza urządzenia�
17� Użycie na wolnym powietrzu: Ten telewizor nie jest przeznaczony do montażu na wolnym
powietrzu� Nie wystawiaj telewizora na działanie deszczu, ponieważ może to spowodować
pożar lub porażenie prądem elektrycznym� Nie narażaj telewizora na bezpośrednie działanie
promieni słonecznych, gdyż może to doprowadzić do jego przegrzania i uszkodzenia�
Bezpieczeństwo:
ABY ZMNIEJSZYĆ RYZYKO PORAŻENIA PRĄDEM
ELEKTRYCZNYM, NIE ZDEJMUJ OSŁONY (OR BACK)�
W URZĄDZENIU NIE MA ŻADNYCH CZĘŚCI, KTÓRE
UŻYTKOWNIK MÓGŁBY SAM NAPRAWIĆ� KORZYSTAJ
JEDYNIE Z USŁUG WYKWALIFIKOWANEGO PERSONELU�
Niebezpieczne napięcie: Symbol błyskawicy ze strzałką w
trójkącie równobocznym ma za zadanie ostrzegać użytkownika
przed niebezpiecznym napięciem wewnątrz produktu, które może
stwarzać ryzyko porażenia prądem elektrycznym�
Instrukcja:
Wykrzyknik w trójkącie równobocznym ma za zadanie ostrzegać
użytkownika o obecności ważnych instrukcji z zakresu obsługi
i serwisowania, znajdujących się w dołączonej do urządzenia
dokumentacji�
3
Polski
Ważne informacje dotyczące bezpieczeństwa 1
Ważne wskazówki
Nigdy nie umieszczaj telewizora w niestabilnym położeniu� Może spowodować to jego upadek a
poprzez to poważne obrażenia ciała lub śmierć� Wielu urazów, zwłaszcza u dzieci, można łatwo
uniknąć, stosując proste środki ostrożności takie jak:
* Stosowanie szafek lub stojaków zalecanych przez producenta telewizora�
* Stosowanie wyłącznie mebli będących w stanie bezpiecznie utrzymać ciężar telewizora�
* Zadbanie o to, aby telewizor nie wystawał poza krawędzie podtrzymujących go mebli�
* Nieumieszczanie telewizora na wysokich meblach (na przykład szafkach lub regałach) bez
odpowiedniego mocowania mebli i telewizora�
* Nieumieszczanie telewizora na tkaninach i innych materiałach znajdujących się między
telewizorem a meblem, na którym oparty jest telewizor
* Edukacja dzieci w zakresie niebezpieczeństw związanych ze wspinaniem się na meble w celu
dostania się do telewizora lub jego elementów sterujących�
Powyższych zaleceń należy przestrzegać również w przypadku zatrzymania i przenoszenia
dotychczasowego telewizora�
4
Polski
2
Akcesoria
Upewnij się, że do telewizora LED dołączone są następujące przedmioty
Jeśli brakuje jakichkolwiek przedmiotów, skontaktuj się ze sprzedawcą�
Pilot zdalnego
sterowania
2 baterie Instrukcja instalacji
LED TV
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/- -
TIMESHIFT
LIST
Kabel Mini YPbPr
Kabel Mini AV
Instalacja telewizora LED
5
Polski
Mounting on a wall
Attach an optional wall mount bracket at the rear
of the TV carefully and install the wall mount
bracket on a solid wall perpendicular to the
floor. When you attach the TV to other building
materials, please contact qualified personnel.
LG recommends that wall mounting be
performed by a qualified professional installer.
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
Make sure to use screws and wall mount
bracket that meet the VESA standard. Standard
dimensions for the wall mount kits are described
in the following table.
Separate purchase(Wall Mounting Bracket)
Model
VESA (A x B) 200 x 200
Standard
screw
M4
Number of
screws
2
100 x 100
M4
2
Wall mount bracket
A
B
43”24”/32”
43”24”/32”
(*Not Provided) (*Not Provided)
Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3
24”: Insert 2 screws
32”/43”: Insert 4 screws
1. Place the TV set on soft cloth or cushion with face down.Place the base in position as shown.
2. I ver.
3. Place the TV upward.
FrontBack
2
Instalacja telewizora LED
Montaż podstawy
1� Umieść telewizor na miękkiej tkaninie lub poduszce przednią stroną skierowaną w dół�
Umieść podstawę w przedstawionej pozycji�
2� Włóż śruby (dołączone w zestawie) w otworach na śruby i wkręć je śrubokrętem�
3� Umieść telewizor w pozycji pionowej�
Mounting on a wall
Attach an optional wall mount bracket at the rear
of the TV carefully and install the wall mount
bracket on a solid wall perpendicular to the
floor. When you attach the TV to other building
materials, please contact qualified personnel.
LG recommends that wall mounting be
performed by a qualified professional installer.
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
Make sure to use screws and wall mount
bracket that meet the VESA standard. Standard
dimensions for the wall mount kits are described
in the following table.
Separate purchase(Wall Mounting Bracket)
Model
VESA (A x B) 200 x 200
Standard
screw
M4
Number of
screws
2
100 x 100
M4
2
Wall mount bracket
A
B
43”24”/32”
43”24”/32”
(*Not Provided) (*Not Provided)
Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3
24”: Insert 2 screws
32”/43”: Insert 4 screws
1. Place the TV set on soft cloth or cushion with face down.Place the base in position as shown.
2. I ver.
3. Place the TV upward.
FrontBack
Rysunek 1 Rysunek 2
Tył Przód
24”: Włóż 2 śruby
32”/43”: Włóż 4 śruby
Rysunek 3
Montaż na ścianie
Zamocuj opcjonalny uchwyt do montażu
ściennego z tyłu telewizora, a następnie
zainstaluj uchwyt do montażu ściennego
na ścianie litej prostopadle do podłogi� W
przypadku montażu telewizora na innym
materiale budowlanym skontaktuj się z
wykwalikowanym personelem�
Upewnij się, że śruby i uchwyt do montażu
ściennego spełniają wymogi standardu VESA�
Standardowe wymiary zestawów do montażu
ściennego są opisane w poniższej tabeli�
Oddzielny zakup
(uchwyt do montażu ściennego)
Model 24”/32” 43”
VESA (A x B) 100 x 100 200 x 200
Standardowa
śruba M4 M4
Liczba śrub 2 2
Uchwyt do montażu ściennego
24”/32”
(*niedołączone
w zestawie)
43”
(*niedołączone
w zestawie)
Mounting on a wall
Attach an optional wall mount bracket at the rear
of the TV carefully and install the wall mount
bracket on a solid wall perpendicular to the
floor. When you attach the TV to other building
materials, please contact qualified personnel.
LG recommends that wall mounting be
performed by a qualified professional installer.
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
Make sure to use screws and wall mount
bracket that meet the VESA standard. Standard
dimensions for the wall mount kits are described
in the following table.
Separate purchase(Wall Mounting Bracket)
Model
VESA (A x B) 200 x 200
Standard
screw
M4
Number of
screws
2
100 x 100
M4
2
Wall mount bracket
A
B
43”24”/32”
43”24”/32”
(*Not Provided) (*Not Provided)
Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3
24”: Insert 2 screws
32”/43”: Insert 4 screws
1. Place the TV set on soft cloth or cushion with face down.Place the base in position as shown.
2. I ver.
3. Place the TV upward.
FrontBack
Mounting on a wall
Attach an optional wall mount bracket at the rear
of the TV carefully and install the wall mount
bracket on a solid wall perpendicular to the
floor. When you attach the TV to other building
materials, please contact qualified personnel.
LG recommends that wall mounting be
performed by a qualified professional installer.
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
Make sure to use screws and wall mount
bracket that meet the VESA standard. Standard
dimensions for the wall mount kits are described
in the following table.
Separate purchase(Wall Mounting Bracket)
Model
VESA (A x B) 200 x 200
Standard
screw
M4
Number of
screws
2
100 x 100
M4
2
Wall mount bracket
A
B
43”24”/32”
43”24”/32”
(*Not Provided) (*Not Provided)
Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3
24”: Insert 2 screws
32”/43”: Insert 4 screws
1. Place the TV set on soft cloth or cushion with face down.Place the base in position as shown.
2. I ver.
3. Place the TV upward.
FrontBack
Mounting on a wall
Attach an optional wall mount bracket at the rear
of the TV carefully and install the wall mount
bracket on a solid wall perpendicular to the
floor. When you attach the TV to other building
materials, please contact qualified personnel.
LG recommends that wall mounting be
performed by a qualified professional installer.
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
Make sure to use screws and wall mount
bracket that meet the VESA standard. Standard
dimensions for the wall mount kits are described
in the following table.
Separate purchase(Wall Mounting Bracket)
Model
VESA (A x B) 200 x 200
Standard
screw
M4
Number of
screws
2
100 x 100
M4
2
Wall mount bracket
A
B
43”24”/32”
43”24”/32”
(*Not Provided) (*Not Provided)
Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3
24”: Insert 2 screws
32”/43”: Insert 4 screws
1. Place the TV set on soft cloth or cushion with face down.Place the base in position as shown.
2. I ver.
3. Place the TV upward.
FrontBack
6
Polski
Opis ogólny telewizora3
Lp� Opis
1/ZASILANIE Włączanie telewizora/tryb czuwania�
2SOURCE Wybór źródła sygnału wejściowego�
3MENU Włączanie/wyłączanie menu OSD�
4 + CH - Przełączenie na wyższy/niższy kanał, gdy źródłem sygnału jest
telewizor lub wybranie opcji w menu OSD�
5+ VOL - Zwiększenie/zmniejszenie głośności lub regulacja pozycji wybranej
w menu OSD�
Części i przyciski
7
Polski
Podłączanie anteny 4
PODŁĄCZANIE
Podłącz do telewizora różne urządzenia
zewnętrzne i przełącz tryby sygnału
wejściowego, aby wybrać odpowiednie
urządzenie zewnętrzne� Więcej informacji na
temat podłączania urządzeń zewnętrznych
można znaleźć w instrukcji dostarczonej wraz z
tym urządzeniem�
Dostępne są następujące urządzenia
zewnętrzne: Odbiorniki HD, odtwarzacze DVD,
systemy audio, urządzenia magazynujące
USB, komputery PC i inne urządzenia
zewnętrzne�
Podłączanie anteny
Podłącz telewizor do naściennego gniazda
antenowego za pomocą kabla RF (75 Ω)�
MAKING CONNECTIONS
Connect various external devices to the TV
and switch input modes to select an external
device. For more information of external devices
connection, refer to the manual provided with
each device.
Available external devices are: HD receivers,
DVD players, audio systems, USB
storage devices, PC, and other external
devices.
NOTE
yThe external device connection may differ
from the model.
yConnect external devices to the TV
regardless of the order of the TV port.
yRefer to the external equipments manual
for operating instructions.
yIn PC mode, there may be noise
associated with the resolution, vertical
pattern, contrast or brightness. If noise is
present, change the PC output to another
resolution, change the refresh rate to
another rate or adjust the brightness and
contrast on the PICTURE menu until the
picture is clear.
yIn PC mode, some resolution settings
may not work properly depending on the
graphics card.
Connect the TV to a wall antenna socket with an
RF cable (75 ).
NOTE
yUse a signal splitter to use more than 2
TVs.
yIf the image quality is poor, install a signal
amplifier properly to improve the image
quality.
yIf the image quality is poor with an
antenna connected, try to realign the
antenna in the correct direction.
yAn antenna cable and converter are not
supplied.
ySupported DTV Audio: MPEG, Dolby
Digital.
Antenna connection
SAT/LNB
AERIAL/
CABLE
Użyj rozgałęźnika sygnału, aby użyć więcej niż
2 telewizorów
W przypadku słabej jakości obrazu zainstaluj
prawidłowo wzmacniacz sygnału w celu
poprawy jakości obrazu�
W przypadku słabej jakości obrazu przy
podłączonej antenie spróbuj ustawić antenę
we właściwym kierunku�
Przewód antenowy i konwerter nie są dołączone
w zestawie�
Obsługiwany dźwięk DTV: MPEG, Dolby Digital�
UWAGA
MAKING CONNECTIONS
Connect various external devices to the TV
and switch input modes to select an external
device. For more information of external devices
connection, refer to the manual provided with
each device.
Available external devices are: HD receivers,
DVD players, audio systems, USB
storage devices, PC, and other external
devices.
NOTE
yThe external device connection may differ
from the model.
yConnect external devices to the TV
regardless of the order of the TV port.
yRefer to the external equipments manual
for operating instructions.
yIn PC mode, there may be noise
associated with the resolution, vertical
pattern, contrast or brightness. If noise is
present, change the PC output to another
resolution, change the refresh rate to
another rate or adjust the brightness and
contrast on the PICTURE menu until the
picture is clear.
yIn PC mode, some resolution settings
may not work properly depending on the
graphics card.
Connect the TV to a wall antenna socket with an
RF cable (75 ).
NOTE
yUse a signal splitter to use more than 2
TVs.
yIf the image quality is poor, install a signal
amplifier properly to improve the image
quality.
yIf the image quality is poor with an
antenna connected, try to realign the
antenna in the correct direction.
yAn antenna cable and converter are not
supplied.
ySupported DTV Audio: MPEG, Dolby
Digital.
Antenna connection
SAT/LNB
AERIAL/
CABLE
UWAGA
Złącze urządzenia zewnętrznego może różnić
się w zależności od modelu�
Urządzenia zewnętrzne można podłączać do
telewizora niezależnie od kolejności portów
telewizora�
Więcej informacji na ten temat można znaleźć
w instrukcji obsługi urządzenia zewnętrznego�
W trybie PC mogą wystąpić zakłócenia
związane z rozdzielczością, wzorem pionowym,
kontrastem lub jasnością� W przypadku
wystąpienia zakłóceń zmień rozdzielczość
wyjścia PC lub jego częstotliwość odświeżania
albo dostosuj jasność i kontrast w menu
OBRAZ aż do uzyskania czystego obrazu�
W zależności od karty gracznej niektóre
ustawienia rozdzielczości mogą nie działać
poprawnie w trybie PC�
MAKING CONNECTIONS
Connect various external devices to the TV
and switch input modes to select an external
device. For more information of external devices
connection, refer to the manual provided with
each device.
Available external devices are: HD receivers,
DVD players, audio systems, USB
storage devices, PC, and other external
devices.
NOTE
yThe external device connection may differ
from the model.
yConnect external devices to the TV
regardless of the order of the TV port.
yRefer to the external equipments manual
for operating instructions.
yIn PC mode, there may be noise
associated with the resolution, vertical
pattern, contrast or brightness. If noise is
present, change the PC output to another
resolution, change the refresh rate to
another rate or adjust the brightness and
contrast on the PICTURE menu until the
picture is clear.
yIn PC mode, some resolution settings
may not work properly depending on the
graphics card.
Connect the TV to a wall antenna socket with an
RF cable (75 ).
NOTE
yUse a signal splitter to use more than 2
TVs.
yIf the image quality is poor, install a signal
amplifier properly to improve the image
quality.
yIf the image quality is poor with an
antenna connected, try to realign the
antenna in the correct direction.
yAn antenna cable and converter are not
supplied.
ySupported DTV Audio: MPEG, Dolby
Digital.
Antenna connection
SAT/LNB
AERIAL/
CABLE
ANTENA/
TELEWIZJA
KABLOWA
8
Polski
Podłączanie urządzeń zewnętrznych
5
Wyłącz zasilanie na czas podłączania telewizora do urządzenia zewnętrznego�
Po podłączeniu do gniazda odpowiedniego urządzenia multimedialnego, takiego jak odtwarzacz
DVD, komputer PC itp�, oraz wybraniu odpowiedniego źródła sygnału wejściowego telewizor
może odtwarzać różne źródła multimedialne�
CamcorderDVD playerPC (HDMI-output)Blu-ray disc playerAudio system
DVD player with
component output Headphone
USB
ARCSCART
TV
CI SLOT
The sound
system
HDMI1(ARC)
AERIAL/CABLESAT/LNB
VGA IN PC AUDIO IN
USB EARPHONE
HDMI2 HDMI3
MINI AV IN
MINI
YPBPR IN S/PDIF OUT
CI SLOT
SCART IN
Komputer
Odtwarzacz
DVD z wyjściem
komponentowym
System
dźwiękowy
Słuchawki
GNIAZDO CI
SCART
TV
ARC
System audio PC
(wyjście HDMI) Odtwarzacz
DVD KameraOdtwarzacz
Blu-ray
USB
9
Polski
Korzystanie z pilota 6
1� Skieruj pilota w stronę czujnika zdalnego
sterowania, znajdującego się w lewym rogu
telewizora�
2� Zasięg pilota zdalnego sterowania wynosi ok�
10 metrów przy kącie ok� 30°�
3� Unikaj przeszkód pomiędzy pilotem zdalnego
sterowania a czujnikiem�
☼ Jeśli nie zamierzasz używać pilota przez
dłuższy czas, wyjmij z niego baterie�
☼ Jeśli pilot nie działa prawidłowo lub jeśli jego
zasięg jest ograniczony, wymień obie baterie
na nowe�
Wymiana baterii w pilocie
1� Zdejmij pokrywę baterii poprzez pociągnięcie i uniesienie pokrywy
2� Włóż baterie zgodnie z oznaczeniami (+) i (-) znajdującymi się w komorze baterii�
3� Zamocuj ponownie pokrywę baterii�
PRZESTROGA
Używaj tylko określonych baterii AAA�
Nie używaj nowych i starych baterii jednocześnie� Może to spowodować pęknięcie lub wyciek,
który może doprowadzić do pożaru lub obrażenia ciała�
Włóż baterie zgodnie z oznaczeniami (+) i (-)� Nieprawidłowe włożenie baterii może spowodować
wyciek, który może doprowadzić do pożaru lub obrażenia ciała�
Zużytą baterię należy zutylizować zgodnie z lokalnymi przepisami�
Trzymaj baterie z dala od dzieci i zwierząt domowych�
Jeśli pilot zdalnego sterowania nie będzie używany przez dłuższy czas, wyjmij z niego baterie�
Obsługa pilota
30 30
IR Receiver
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
Odbiornik
podczerwieni
10
Polski
Korzystanie z pilota
6
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
1. ZASILANIE Włączanie i wyłączanie trybu czuwania�
2. WYCISZ Włączanie lub wyłączanie dźwięku�
3. P.MODE Wybór trybu obrazu�
4. S.MODE Zmiana trybu dźwięku�
5. FAV Wyświetlanie listy ulubionych kanałów
6. SLEEP Włączanie funkcji uśpienia, dzięki której telewizor wyłącza
się po upływie wyznaczonego czasu�
7. FREEZE Zatrzymywanie obrazu wideo� Naciśnij ponownie przycisk,
aby wznowić odtwarzanie obrazu�
8. CH.LIST Wyświetlanie listy kanałów
9. AUTO Włączanie automatycznej regulacji w trybie VGA�
10. ASPECT Zmiana trybu wyświetlania telewizora�
11. 0-9 Zmiana kanału telewizora�
12. -/-- Wybieranie programu o numerze wyższym niż 09�
13.
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
Powrót do ostatnio oglądanego kanału�
14. MENU Włączanie menu ekranowego (OSD)�
15. EXIT Wyjście z menu OSD�
16. ▲▼◄► Wybieranie opcji lub ustawień w menu�
17. OK Potwierdzenie po wybraniu opcji w menu OSD�
18. SOURCE Wyświetlanie i wybór dostępnych źródeł wideo�
19. DISPLAY Wyświetlanie okna informacji�
20. CH (+/-) Zmiana kanału TV na następny/poprzedni�
21. VOL (+/-) Zwiększenie lub zmniejszenie głośności telewizora�
22. TEXT Uruchamianie trybu teletekstu�
23. EPG Wyświetlanie elektronicznego przewodnika po
programach�
24. AUDIO Przełączanie dźwięku na tryb PAL-BG/Stereo lub PAL-BG
Momo (ATV) oraz języków audio�
25. SUBTITLE Otwieranie menu napisów dialogowych w celu wybrania
napisów
26. INDEX
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
Wyświetlanie listy i informacji o stronach teletekstu�
Odtwarzanie poprzedniego rozdziału, tytułu lub ścieżki�
27. HOLD
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
Zatrzymanie bieżącej strony teletekstu na ekranie�
Odtwarzanie następnego rozdziału, tytułu lub ścieżki�
28. SIZE
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
Zmiana rozmiaru obrazu w trybie teletekstu�
Skanowanie wstecz�
29. REVEAL
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
Wyświetlanie lub usuwanie treści ukrytej w trybie teletekstu�
Skanowanie w przód�
30. TIMESHIFT
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
Uruchamianie funkcji przesunięcia czasowego�
Odtwarzanie lub zatrzymanie bieżącego programu�
31. LIST
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
Wyświetlanie listy plików PVR�
Zatrzymanie bieżącego programu�
32.
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
Uruchomienie nagrywania�
33. SUBPAGE Wyświetlanie podmenu trybu teletekstu�
34. KOLOR Operacja odpowiednia dla menu OSD�
11
Polski
Włączanie i wyłączanie telewizora
Naciśnij przycisk ZASILANIE na pilocie zdalnego sterowania�
Możesz również użyć przycisku zasilania znajdującego na
dole/z boku panelu�
* W przypadku braku sygnału wejściowego, po 15 minutach
telewizor zostanie wyłączony automatycznie�
Pierwsza konguracja
Podłącz kabel RF z wejścia telewizora o nazwie „RF-In” do gniazda antenowego telewizora�
Wybór języka
Użyj przycisków ◄/►, aby wybrać język używany w menu i komunikatach�
Wybór kraju
Użyj przycisków ▼/▲, aby zaznaczyć odpowiedni kraj�
Użyj przycisków ◄/►, aby wybrać odpowiedni kraj�
OK
Germany
Environment
Digital Type
Home Mode
DVB-T
Automatyczne wyszukiwanie kanałów
W przypadku wyszukiwania kanałów ATV naciśnij przycisk Menu i strzałkę w lewo, aby pominąć
wyszukiwanie ATV; w przypadku wyszukiwania kanałów DTV naciśnij przycisk Menu i strzałkę w
lewo, aby pominąć wyszukiwanie DTV
Thailand
OK
Zmiana kanałów
1� Używanie przycisków kanałów
Aby zmienić kanał, użyj przycisków +CH-; telewizor zmienia
kanały w odpowiedniej kolejności� Zobaczysz wszystkie
zapisane w pamięci kanały� Usunięte lub niezapisane kanały nie
zostaną wyświetlone�
* Aby powrócić do poprzedniego kanału, naciśnij przycisk
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
MENU EXIT
FREEZE
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
+
SOURCE
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
LIST
Podstawowa obsługa telewizora 7
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
1. ZASILANIE Włączanie i wyłączanie trybu czuwania�
2. WYCISZ Włączanie lub wyłączanie dźwięku�
3. P.MODE Wybór trybu obrazu�
4. S.MODE Zmiana trybu dźwięku�
5. FAV Wyświetlanie listy ulubionych kanałów
6. SLEEP Włączanie funkcji uśpienia, dzięki której telewizor wyłącza
się po upływie wyznaczonego czasu�
7. FREEZE Zatrzymywanie obrazu wideo� Naciśnij ponownie przycisk,
aby wznowić odtwarzanie obrazu�
8. CH.LIST Wyświetlanie listy kanałów
9. AUTO Włączanie automatycznej regulacji w trybie VGA�
10. ASPECT Zmiana trybu wyświetlania telewizora�
11. 0-9 Zmiana kanału telewizora�
12. -/-- Wybieranie programu o numerze wyższym niż 09�
13.
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
Powrót do ostatnio oglądanego kanału�
14. MENU Włączanie menu ekranowego (OSD)�
15. EXIT Wyjście z menu OSD�
16. ▲▼◄► Wybieranie opcji lub ustawień w menu�
17. OK Potwierdzenie po wybraniu opcji w menu OSD�
18. SOURCE Wyświetlanie i wybór dostępnych źródeł wideo�
19. DISPLAY Wyświetlanie okna informacji�
20. CH (+/-) Zmiana kanału TV na następny/poprzedni�
21. VOL (+/-) Zwiększenie lub zmniejszenie głośności telewizora�
22. TEXT Uruchamianie trybu teletekstu�
23. EPG Wyświetlanie elektronicznego przewodnika po
programach�
24. AUDIO Przełączanie dźwięku na tryb PAL-BG/Stereo lub PAL-BG
Momo (ATV) oraz języków audio�
25. SUBTITLE Otwieranie menu napisów dialogowych w celu wybrania
napisów
26. INDEX
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
Wyświetlanie listy i informacji o stronach teletekstu�
Odtwarzanie poprzedniego rozdziału, tytułu lub ścieżki�
27. HOLD
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
Zatrzymanie bieżącej strony teletekstu na ekranie�
Odtwarzanie następnego rozdziału, tytułu lub ścieżki�
28. SIZE
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
Zmiana rozmiaru obrazu w trybie teletekstu�
Skanowanie wstecz�
29. REVEAL
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
Wyświetlanie lub usuwanie treści ukrytej w trybie teletekstu�
Skanowanie w przód�
30. TIMESHIFT
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
Uruchamianie funkcji przesunięcia czasowego�
Odtwarzanie lub zatrzymanie bieżącego programu�
31. LIST
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
Wyświetlanie listy plików PVR�
Zatrzymanie bieżącego programu�
32.
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
Uruchomienie nagrywania�
33. SUBPAGE Wyświetlanie podmenu trybu teletekstu�
34. KOLOR Operacja odpowiednia dla menu OSD�
12
Polski
Regulacja głośności
Naciśnij + VOL -, aby wyregulować głośność�
Aby wyłączyć dźwięk, naciśnij przycisk WYCISZ
Aby przywrócić dźwięk, naciśnij ponownie przycisk
WYCISZ lub przycisk VOL +
Wybór źródła sygnału wejściowego
Wybór telewizora lub innych źródeł zewnętrznych podłączonych
do telewizora�
1� Użyj przycisków SOURCE, aby wyświetlić listę źródeł
sygnału wejściowego�
2� Użyj przycisków ▼/▲ lub SOURCE, aby wybrać
odpowiednie źródło sygnału wejściowego� (Telewizja
satelitarna, DTV, ATV, AV, PC, SCART, złącze
komponentowe, HDMI, nośnik)�
3� Naciśnij przycisk OK, aby wybrać źródło sygnału
wejściowego�
4� Naciśnij przycisk EXIT, aby wyjść�
+
SOURCE
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
LIST
OK
HDMI3
Podstawowa obsługa telewizora
7
13
Polski
Obsługa menu 8
W dalszych rozdziałach należy zastosować następujące kroki w ustawieniach menu� Proszę
postępować zgodnie z przedstawionymi krokami�
W przedstawionych instrukcjach i schematach ustawień menu źródłem sygnału wejściowego jest
telewizor� Wszelkie wyjątki zostaną oddzielnie zaznaczone�
W przypadku innych źródeł sygnału możne nie być możliwe regulowanie wartości pewnych pozycji�
Otwieranie Menu
Naciśnij przycisk [MENU], aby wyświetlić menu główne�
Używaj przycisków [◄/►], aby wybrać odpowiednie menu w menu głównym�
Używaj przycisków [OK] lub [▼/▲], aby wejść do tego menu�
Obsługa Menu
[▼/▲]: Wybieranie w menu opcji, którą chce się zmienić�
[◄/►]: Zmiana ustawienia lub przejście do podmenu�
[OK]: Wejście do podmenu lub potwierdzenie�
Wyjście z Menu
Naciśnij przycisk [MENU], aby powrócić do poprzedniego menu lub wyjść z menu; aby wyjść z
menu, można także nacisnąć przycisk [EXIT]�
To menu działa tylko w trybie TV
KANAŁ
Menu Kanału
1� Wyszukiwanie automatyczne
Użyj przycisków ▼/▲, aby zaznaczyć pozycję strojenia automatycznego, a następnie naciśnij
przycisk OK/►, aby ją wyświetlić�
2� Wyszukiwanie ręczne ATV
Użyj przycisków ▼/▲, aby zaznaczyć pozycję strojenia ręcznego ATV, a następnie naciśnij
przycisk OK, aby przejść do podmenu� Użyj przycisków ◄/►, aby wybrać kanał, a następnie
naciśnij przycisk OK, aby wyszukać program�
3� Strojenie ręczne DTV
Użyj przycisków ▼/▲, aby wybrać pozycję strojenia ręcznego DTV, a następnie naciśnij przycisk
OK, aby przejść do podmenu� Użyj przycisków ◄/►, aby wybrać kanał, a następnie naciśnij
przycisk OK, aby wyszukać program�
4� Edytowanie programu
Użyj przycisków ▼/▲, aby wybrać pozycję edytowania programu, a następnie naciśnij przycisk
OK, aby przejść do podmenu�
5� Lista harmonogramów
Użyj przycisków ▼/▲, aby wybrać pozycję listy harmonogramów, a następnie naciśnij przycisk
OK, aby przejść do podmenu� Dostępne w źródle�
6� Informacje o sygnale
Użyj przycisków ▼/▲, aby wybrać pozycję informacji o sygnale; naciśnij przycisk OK, aby
wyświetlić szczegółowe informacje o sygnale� Dostępne tylko wtedy, gdy w DTV jest sygnał�
7� Informacje CI
Użyj przycisków ▼/▲, aby wybrać pozycję informacji CI, a następnie naciśnij przycisk OK, aby
przejść do podmenu�
14
Polski
OBRAZ Dostępna do regulacji opcja może różnić się w zależności od źródła
sygnału, ale funkcje tej opcji pozostaną takie same�
Menu Obrazu
1. Tryb obrazu
Użyj przycisków ▼/▲, aby wybrać pozycję trybu obrazu, a następnie naciśnij przycisk OK, aby
przejść do podmenu� Możesz zmienić wartość kontrastu, jasności, koloru, ostrości i odcienia, jeśli
obraz znajduje się w trybie osobistym�
2. Kontrast/Jasność/Kolor/Odcień/Ostrość
Te ustawienia można zmieniać tylko wtedy, gdy w pozycji trybu obrazu Picture Mode wybrano
opcję User
Użyj przycisków ▼/▲, aby wybrać daną opcję, a następnie naciśnij przycisk ◄/►, aby ją wyregulować�
3. Temperatura kolorów
Użyj przycisków ▼/▲, aby wybrać temperaturę kolorów, a następnie naciśnij przycisk OK, aby
przejść do podmenu�
Użyj przycisków ▼/▲, aby dokonać wyboru� (Dostępne tryby obrazu: Zimny, normalny, ciepły)�
4. Redukcja zakłóceń obrazu
Funkcja ma na celu eliminowanie lub zredukowanie zakłóceń obrazu oraz poprawę jego jakości�
Użyj przycisków ▼/▲, aby wybrać pozycję redukcji zakłóceń, a następnie naciśnij przycisk OK,
aby przejść do podmenu�
5. Tryb HDMI
Naciśnij ▼/▲, aby wybrać tryb HDMI, a następnie naciśnij przycisk OK, aby przejść do podmenu�
DŹWIĘK
Menu Dźwięku
1. Tryb dźwięku
Wybierz tryb dźwięku, który najbardziej Ci odpowiada� Wartości tonów wysokich i niskich są
dostępne tylko w trybie Użytkownik; można je dostosować do własnych potrzeb�
2. Tony wysokie/niskie
Użyj przycisków ▼/▲, aby wybrać daną opcję; naciśnij przycisk ◄/►, aby ją wyregulować�
Tony wysokie i niskie są dostępne tylko w trybie Użytkownik; można je dostosować do własnych
potrzeb�
3. Wyrównanie
Użyj przycisków ▼/▲, aby wybrać daną opcję; naciśnij przycisk ◄/►, aby ją wyregulować�
4. Balance
Użyj przycisków ▼/▲, aby wybrać pozycję automatycznego poziomu głośności, a następnie
naciśnij przycisk OK, aby wybrać wartość Wł� lub Wył�
5. Tryb SPDIF
Użyj przycisków ▼/▲, aby wybrać pozycję trybu SPDIF, a następnie naciśnij przycisk OK, aby
wybrać opcję Wył�/PCM/Auto�
6. Audio Delay AD
Użyj przycisków ▼/▲, aby wybrać pozycję przełącznika AD, a następnie naciśnij przycisk OK,
aby wybrać wartość Wł� lub Wył� Funkcja Amblyopia dla osób niewidomych; ścieżki zostaną
złączone w celu opisania bieżącego ekranu� Funkcja wymaga obsługi Coldstream�
UWAGA:
Wyrównanie: Ta pozycja pozwala na regulację wyjścia głośnika, dzięki czemu można zwiększyć
słyszalność w miejscu, w którym się znajduje�
Automatyczna głośność: Ta pozycja służy do automatycznego zmniejszenia różnic pomiędzy
głośnością kanału i programu�
8Obsługa menu
15
Polski
Obsługa menu 8
CZAS
Menu Czasu
1. Zegar
Użyj przycisków ▼/▲, aby wybrać: Datę/Miesiąc/Rok/Godzinę/Minutę�
Użyj przycisków ▼/▲, aby ustawić zegar
2. Strefa czasowa
Użyj przycisków ▼/▲, aby wybrać strefę czasową, a następnie naciśnij przycisk OK, aby przejść
do podmenu�
3. Sleep-Timer
Określ czas w minutach, po upłynięciu którego telewizor zostanie wyłączonyAnuluj odliczanie,
wybierając wartość Wył�
4. Auto Standby
Użyj przycisków ▼/▲, aby wybrać pozycję automatycznego czuwania, a następnie naciśnij
przycisk OK, aby przejść do podmenu�
Jeśli pilot zdalnego sterowania nie wykonuje żadnych działań w czasie czuwania, nastąpi
automatyczne uśpienie� Jeśli wykonasz jakiekolwiek działanie, spowoduje to zresetowanie czasu�
5. Timer OSD
Użyj przycisków ▼/▲, aby wybrać pozycję timera OSD, a następnie naciśnij przycisk OK, aby
przejść do podmenu�
UWAGA:
Zegar zmieni się zależnie od regionu, który został wybrany w ustawieniach strefy czasowej�
BLOKADA
Menu Blokowania
1. Blokada systemu
Użyj przycisków ▼/▲, aby wybrać pozycję blokady systemu, a następnie naciśnij przycisk OK,
aby aktywować następujące 3 opcje� Domyślne hasło to 0000; jeśli zapomnisz ustawione przez
siebie hasło, zadzwoń do centrum obsługi klienta�
2. Ustawianie hasła
Użyj przycisków ▼/▲, aby wybrać pozycję ustawiania hasła, a następnie naciśnij przycisk OK,
aby przejść do podmenu w celu ustawienia nowego hasła�
3. Blokada kanału
Użyj przycisków ▼/▲, aby wybrać opcję blokady kanałów, a następnie naciśnij przycisk OK, aby
przejść do podmenu� Naciśnij zielony przycisk, aby zablokować lub odblokować kanał�
4. Nadzór rodzicielski
Użyj przycisków ▼/▲, aby wybrać pozycję nadzoru rodzicielskiego, a następnie naciśnij przycisk
OK, aby przejść do podmenu, gdzie będzie można określić odpowiedni dla Twoich dzieci
przedział wiekowy
5. Blokada klawiszy
Użyj przycisków ▼/▲, aby wybrać opcję blokady klawiszy, a następnie naciśnij przycisk ◄/►,
aby wybrać wartość Wł� lub Wył�
Po włączeniu blokady klawiszy nie można używać przycisku panelu�
6. Tryb hotelowy
Użyj przycisków ▼/▲, aby wybrać opcję trybu hotelowego, a następnie naciśnij przycisk OK, aby
wybrać wartość Wł� lub Wył�
16
Polski
Obsługa menu
8
KONFIGURACJA
Menu Konguracji
1. Język
Ustawianie języka wyświetlania�
2. Język Telegazety
Użyj przycisków ▼/▲, aby wybrać język TT, a następnie naciśnij przycisk OK, aby przejść do
podmenu�
3. Języki audio
Użyj przycisków ▼/▲, aby wybrać pozycję języków audio, a następnie naciśnij przycisk OK, aby
przejść do podmenu�
4. Język napisów
Naciśnij ▼/▲, aby wybrać pozycję języka napisów, a następnie naciśnij przycisk OK, aby przejść
do podmenu�
5. Dla niedosłyszących
Użyj przycisków ▼/▲, aby wybrać pozycję dla niedosłyszących, a następnie naciśnij przycisk
◄/►, aby wybrać wartość Wł� lub Wył�
6. System plików PVR
Użyj przycisków ▼/▲, aby wybrać pozycję systemu plików PVR, a następnie naciśnij przycisk
OK, aby przejść do podmenu�
Użyj przycisków ▼/▲, aby wybrać pozycję sprawdzania systemu plików PVR, a następnie
naciśnij przycisk OK, aby przejść do kolejnego ekranu� Zostanie uruchomiony test prędkość USB�
7. Proporcje ekranu
Ustawianie proporcji obrazu�
8. Niebieski ekran
Ustawianie niebieskiego lub czarnego koloru tła w przypadku, gdy nie ma sygnału wejściowego�
9. Pierwsza instalacja
Użyj przycisków ▼/▲, aby wybrać pozycję pierwszej instalacji, a następnie naciśnij przycisk OK,
aby przejść do kolejnego ekranu�
10. Resetowanie
Użyj przycisków ▼/▲, aby wybrać opcję resetowania, a następnie naciśnij przycisk OK, aby
przejść do podmenu�
11. Aktualizacja oprogramowania (USB)
Użyj przycisków ▼/▲, aby wybrać opcję aktualizacji oprogramowania (USB), podłącz urządzenie
USB do gniazda USB, a następnie naciśnij przycisk OK, aby zaktualizować dane oprogramowanie�
12. Tryb wyświetlania
Użyj przycisków ▼/▲, aby wybrać tryb wyświetlania, a następnie naciśnij przycisk ◄/►, aby
wybrać opcję trybu domowego lub trybu sklepowego�
13. HDMI CEC
Użyj przycisków ▼/▲, aby wybrać pozycję HDMI CEC, a następnie naciśnij przycisk OK, aby
przejść do podmenu�
17
Polski
Multimedia 9
Uwaga: Przed włączeniem menu nośnika podłącz urządzenie USB, a następnie naciśnij przycisk
SOURCE, aby ustawić źródło sygnału wejściowego na nośnik�
Użyj przycisków ▼/▲, aby wybrać pozycję nośnika w menu źródła, a następnie naciśnij przycisk OK
Po rozpoznaniu urządzenia magazynującego USB przez telewizor użyj przycisków ◄ i ►, aby
wybrać zdjęcie/muzykę/lm/tekst, a następnie naciśnij przycisk OK, aby wykonać daną operację
na zdjęciu/muzyce/lmie/tekście�
jlbhd.jpg
Pause
Info.
jlbhd.jpg
Play
Play
Aa
Char Set 1
Time 14:30:58
Date Fri Mar 14, 2014
-----------------------------------
-----------------------------------
------
-----------------------------------
-----------------------------------
------
Music Playlist
Aa
Char Set
Previous P...
1� W razie potrzeby użyj przycisków ◄ i ►, aby wybrać folder podrzędny, a następnie naciśnij
przycisk OK, aby wejść do folderu� Naciśnij przycisk OK w celu odtworzenia lub naciśnij
przycisk wyjścia w celu powrotu� Naciśnij przycisk OK, aby wybrać folder nadrzędny i wrócić
do poprzedniego poziomu; użyj przycisków ◄ i ►, aby zmienić stronę�
2� Naciśnij przycisk ►, aby rozpocząć lub wstrzymać odtwarzanie� Naciśnij przycisk , aby
zatrzymać odtwarzanie�
3� Naciśnij przycisk , aby odtworzyć ostatnią pozycję� Naciśnij przycisk , aby odtworzyć
następną pozycję�
18
Polski
Ważne wskazóki
MTP (protokół przesyłania multimediów) nie jest obsługiwany
Maks� pojemność dysku twardego: 500GB�
Urządzenie obsługuje tylko pamięć ash USB z formatem FAT32� Telewizor nie gwarantuje
obsługi dysków ash USB w innych formatach (na przykład FAT16 lub NTFS)�
Jeśli urządzenie USB wymaga dużej mocy (powyżej 500mA lub 5V), urządzenie USB może nie
być obsługiwane�
Telewizor nie obsługuje urządzeń USB z wieloma partycjami�
Urządzenia należy podłączać bezpośrednio do portu USB w telewizorze� Jeśli używasz
oddzielnego kabla lub koncentratora USB, może wystąpić problem ze zgodnością z portem USB�
Przed podłączeniem urządzenia do telewizora należy utworzyć kopie zapasowe plików, aby
zapobiec ich uszkodzeniom lub utracie danych� Użytkownik ponosi odpowiedzialność za wszelkie
uszkodzenia lub utratę danych�
Im większa rozdzielczość obrazu, tym dłużej trwa jego wyświetlanie na ekranie�
Prędkość urządzenia USB może różnić się w zależności od urządzenia�
W przypadku nieobsługiwanych lub uszkodzonych plików wyświetlany jest komunikat
„unsupported File (Nieobsługiwany plik)”�
Nie można odtwarzać plików MP3 z zabezpieczeniem DRM, które zostały pobrane płatnego
serwisu� DRM to technologia wspierająca kompleksowe i zintegrowane tworzenie i dystrybucję
treści oraz zarządzanie nią, obejmując m�in� ochronę praw i interesów dostawcy treści,
zapobieganie nielegalnemu kopiowaniu treści, a także zarządzanie rachunkami i rozliczeniami�
W trakcie przechodzenia do kolejnego zdjęcia jego załadowanie może zająć kilka sekund� W tym
momencie na ekranie pojawi się ikona ładowania�
Jeśli podłączony jest czytnik kart USB, jego rozmiar może nie zostać wykryty
Jeśli urządzenie USB nie działa prawidłowo, należy je odłączyć i podłączyć ponownie�
Sprawdź, czy urządzenie USB działa prawidłowo z komputerem�
TYP KONTENER ROZSZERZENIE PLIKU
Obraz JPEG .jpg, .jpeg
BMP .bmp
Audio MP3 .mp3
Wideo MP4 .mp4
MPG .mpg
9Multimedia
19
Polski
Rozwiązywanie problemów 10
Przed skontaktowaniem się z serwisem zapoznaj się z poniższym podręcznikiem rozwiązywania
problemów� Jeśli problem nie ustąpi, wyjmij wtyczkę z telewizora i skontaktuj się z serwisem�
Oznaka Lista kontrolna
Brak obrazu, brak dźwięku Sprawdź, czy zasilanie telewizora jest włączone�
Sprawdź połączenie kabla zasilającego i/lub innych kabli�
Normalny obraz, brak dźwięku Sprawdź poziom głośności�
Sprawdź, czy przycisk
Select “Auto Adjust“ to adjust the image.
został wciśnięty czy nie�
Sprawdź podłączenie urządzenia zewnętrznego�
Niska jakość kolorów lub brak
koloru, normalny dźwięk
Sprawdź poziom jasności i kontrastu w menu OBRAZ�
Wiele obrazów,
normalny dźwięk
Sprawdź połączenie i kierunek anteny
Dokładne strojenie telewizora�
Sprawdź podłączenie urządzenia zewnętrznego�
Stacja telewizyjna może mieć problemy z transmisją�
Sprawdź inny kanał�
Zaśnieżony obraz,
niska jakość dźwięku
Sprawdź połączenie i kierunek anteny
Stacja telewizyjna może mieć problemy z transmisją�
Sprawdź inny kanał�
Przerywane zakłócenia Sprawdź, czy źródło zakłóceń jest dobrze ekranowane�
Umieść to urządzenia elektryczne z dala od telewizora�
Niska jakość dźwięku stereo Stacja telewizyjna może mieć problemy z transmisją�
Spróbuj włączyć tryb mono�
Pilot zdalnego sterowania
nie działa�
Sprawdź, czy baterie są prawidłowo włożone�
Baterie mogą być wyczerpane� Wymień je na nowe�
Usuń wszystkie przeszkody między pilotem a czujnikiem
pilota zdalnego sterowania�
Upewnij się, że w czujniku pilota zdalnego sterowania nie
świeci się silne światło�
Na ekranie wyświetla się komunikat
No Signal
Telewizor nie może wykryć sygnału z żadnego wejścia�
Sprawdź, czy kabel jest prawidłowo podłączony
Sprawdź, czy włączone jest zasilanie któregokolwiek
urządzenia zewnętrznego�
Na ekranie pojawia się komunikat
No Signal” lub „Unsupported
Signal” (tylko tryb RGB)
Sprawdź, czy rozdzielczość i częstotliwość wyświetlania
komputera jest odpowiednia dla telewizora� Zapoznaj się
z wykresem zalecanych sygnałów wejściowych RGB�
Obraz nie jest wyśrodkowany (tylko
w trybie PC)
Wybierz funkcję automatycznej regulacji, aby
wyregulować obraz�
20
Polski
Parametry techniczne
11
Model 24 32 43
Rozmiar panelu LED
(podświetlenie LED) 23,8” 32” 43”
Rozdzielczość natywna 1920 × 1080 1920 × 1080 1920 × 1080
System wideo (RF) PAL, SECAM PAL, SECAM PAL, SECAM
System dźwiękowy (RF) D/K, I, BG D/K, I, BG D/K, I, BG
Wbudowane głośniki 2,5W x 2 6W x 2 8W x 2
Pobór energii w trybie
czuwania ≤0,50 W ≤0,50 W ≤0,50 W
Zasilanie patrz etykieta z tyłu patrz etykieta z tyłu patrz etykieta z tyłu
Pobór energii patrz etykieta z tyłu patrz etykieta z tyłu patrz etykieta z tyłu
Sygnały wspomagające
YPbPr VGA HDMI(DVI)
480i 640X480 480i
576i 800X600 576i
480P 1024X768 480P
576P 1366X768 576P
720P 1920X1080 720P
1080i 1080i
1080P 1080P
UWAGA: Konstrukcja i parametry mogą ulec zmianie bez powiadomienia�
Utylizacja
Packaging
The product has been packaged to protect it from damage in transit. The packaging is made
of materials that can be recycled in an environmentally friendly manner.
Device
Old devices should not be disposed of with the normal household rubbish. In accordance
with Directive 2012/19/EU, the device must be properly disposed of at the end of its service
life. This involves separating the materials in the device for the purpose of recycling and pre-
venting any impact on the environment. Take old devices to a collection point for electrical
scrap or a recycling centre. Contact your local waste disposal company or your local authori-
ty for more information on this subject.
Batteries
Do not dispose of used batteries in the household rubbish! They should be taken to a collec-
tion point for used batteries.
Opakowanie
Produkt został zapakowany w celu ochrony przed uszkodzeniem w transporcie�
Opakowanie wykonane jest z materiałów, które można poddać recyklingowi w
sposób przyjazny dla środowiska�
Packaging
The product has been packaged to protect it from damage in transit. The packaging is made
of materials that can be recycled in an environmentally friendly manner.
Device
Old devices should not be disposed of with the normal household rubbish. In accordance
with Directive 2012/19/EU, the device must be properly disposed of at the end of its service
life. This involves separating the materials in the device for the purpose of recycling and pre-
venting any impact on the environment. Take old devices to a collection point for electrical
scrap or a recycling centre. Contact your local waste disposal company or your local authori-
ty for more information on this subject.
Batteries
Do not dispose of used batteries in the household rubbish! They should be taken to a collec-
tion point for used batteries.
Urządzenie
Nie wolno wyrzucać starych urządzeń razem ze zwykłymi odpadami komunalnymi�
Zgodnie z dyrektywą 2012/19/UE urządzenie musi być odpowiednio utylizowane po
upływie okresu eksploatacji� Wiąże się to z oddzielaniem materiałów znajdujących
w urządzeniu w ich celu recyklingu i zapobieżenia negatywnemu wpływowi
na środowisko� Stare urządzenia należy oddać do punktu zbiórki odpadów
elektrycznych lub centrum recyklingu� Aby uzyskać więcej informacji na ten temat,
skontaktuj się z lokalnym zakładem utylizacji odpadów lub z władzami lokalnymi�
Packaging
The product has been packaged to protect it from damage in transit. The packaging is made
of materials that can be recycled in an environmentally friendly manner.
Device
Old devices should not be disposed of with the normal household rubbish. In accordance
with Directive 2012/19/EU, the device must be properly disposed of at the end of its service
life. This involves separating the materials in the device for the purpose of recycling and pre-
venting any impact on the environment. Take old devices to a collection point for electrical
scrap or a recycling centre. Contact your local waste disposal company or your local authori-
ty for more information on this subject.
Batteries
Do not dispose of used batteries in the household rubbish! They should be taken to a collec-
tion point for used batteries.
Baterie
Nie wolno wyrzucać zużytych baterii wraz ze odpadami komunalnymi! Należy je
oddać do punktu zbiórki zużytych baterii�
1
Français
Table des matières
1. Consignes de sécurité importantes ........................................................................ 2
Attention ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������2
2. Installation du téléviseur LED .................................................................................. 4
Accessoires �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������4
Fixation du socle������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������5
3. Description du téléviseur ......................................................................................... 6
Composants et touches �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������6
4. Connexion d'une antenne ........................................................................................ 7
5. Connexion d’appareils externes .............................................................................. 8
6. Utilisation de la télécommande ............................................................................... 9
Insertion des piles de la télécommande ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������9
Utilisation de la télécommande��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������9
7. Utilisation de base du téléviseur ........................................................................... 11
Allumer et éteindre le téléviseur ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 11
Première conguration ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 11
Recherche automatique ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 11
Changer de chaîne ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 11
Réglage du volume������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������12
Sélection d'une source d'entrée ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������12
8. Utilisation des menus ............................................................................................. 13
Menu Chaînes ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 13
Menu Image���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 14
Menu Son ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 14
Menu Temps ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 15
Menu Verrouillage������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 15
Menu De Conguration����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 16
9. Multimédia ............................................................................................................... 17
10. Dépannage ............................................................................................................... 19
11. Spécications .......................................................................................................... 20
Signaux pris en charge ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������20
Mise au rebut ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������20
2
Français
Consignes de sécurité importantes
1
Attention
1� Lisez tout le présent manuel�
2� Conservez le présent manuel�
3� Respectez tous les avertissements�
4� Suivez toutes les instructions�
5� N'utilisez pas ce téléviseur à proximité de l'eau�
6� Nettoyez uniquement avec un chi󰀨on sec.
7� Ne bloquez aucune fente de ventilation� Installer conformément aux directives du fabricant�
8� Ne pas installer à proximité d'une source de chaleur telle que radiateur, bouche de chaleur,
cuisinière ou d'autres appareils (dont des amplicateurs) produisant de la chaleur.
9� Évitez que le cordon d’alimentation ne soit piétiné ou écrasé, surtout au niveau des ches,
prises de courant et au point de sa sortie de l'appareil�
10� N’utilisez que des pièces/accessoires recommandés par le fabricant�
11� Utilisez uniquement avec un chariot, un socle, un trépied, un support ou une table spécié
par le fabricant ou vendu avec l'appareil� Si un chariot est utilisé, déplacez l'ensemble chariot-
appareil avec précaution an de ne pas le renverser.
12� Débranchez le téléviseur pendant les orages ou quand il ne va pas être utilisé pendant une
longue période.
13� Conez toute réparation à un personnel qualié. Des réparations sont nécessaires si l'appareil
est endommagé de quelque manière que ce soit, telle que cordon ou prise d'alimentation
endommagé, liquide renversé sur l'appareil, objets tombés à l'intérieur de l'appareil, l'appareil
a été exposé à la pluie ou à l'humidité, l'appareil ne marche pas normalement ou s'il est
tombé�
14� AVERTISSEMENT : Pour réduire tout risque d’incendie et de choc électrique, n’exposez pas
le téléviseur à la pluie ou à l’humidité�
15� Cet appareil ne doit pas être exposé ni au ruissellement ni à la projection d’eau et aucun objet
contenant de l’eau, tel qu’un vase, ne doit être posé dessus.
16� La prise secteur ou la prise multiple doit rester facilement accessible�
17� Utilisation à l’extérieur : Ce téléviseur n’est pas conçu pour une utilisation en plein air
N’exposez pas le téléviseur à la pluie, car cela peut entraîner un incendie ou un choc
électrique� Par ailleurs, n’exposez pas le téléviseur à la lumière directe du soleil, car il peut
chau󰀨er et subir des dommages.
Sécurité :
POUR RÉDUIRE TOUT RISQUE DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE,
NE DÉPOSEZ PAS LE CAPOT (OU PANNEAU ARRIÈRE). NE
CONTIENT AUCUNE PIÈCE RÉPARABLE PAR L’UTILISATEUR�
CONFIEZ TOUTE RÉPARATION À UN TECHNICIEN QUALIFIÉ
UNIQUEMENT
Tension dangereuse : Le symbole de l'éclair l'intérieur d'un
triangle équilatéral, est destiné alerter l'utilisateur de la présence
d'une tension dangereuse dans le produit, d'une magnitude pou-
vant constituer un risque d'électrocution�
Consigne :
Le point d’exclamation dans un triangle équilatéral est destiné
à alerter l’utilisateur de la présence d’instructions importantes
d’utilisation et d’entretien dans la documentation accompagnant
l’appareil�
3
Français
Consignes de sécurité importantes 1
Attention
AVERTISSEMENT !
Ne placez jamais un téléviseur sur un support instable. Le téléviseur peut tomber, causant des
blessures graves voir la mort. Plusieurs blessures, en particulier pour les enfants, peuvent être
évitées en prenant de simples précautions telles que :
* L'utilisation de meubles ou supports recommandés par le fabricant du téléviseur
* En n’utilisant que des meubles pouvant supporter le téléviseur en toute sécurité�
* En veillant à ce que le téléviseur ne déborde pas du meuble sur lequel il est posé�
* En ne plaçant pas le téléviseur sur un meuble élevé (par exemple, armoire ou bibliothèque)
sans xer ce meuble et l’appareil à un support approprié.
* En ne posant pas le téléviseur sur une éto󰀨e ou tout autre matériau placé entre l'appareil et le
meuble�
* En expliquant aux enfants qu’il est dangereux de tenter d’atteindre le téléviseur ou ses touches
de commande en grimpant sur un meuble.
Si votre téléviseur est transféré et déplacé, les mêmes précautions ci-dessus doivent être
respectées�
4
Français
2
Accessoires
Assurez-vous les articles suivants sont inclus avec votre téléviseur LED�
Contactez votre revendeur si un article est manquant�
Télécommande 2 piles Guide d’installation
TV LED
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/- -
TIMESHIFT
LIST
Mini câble YPbPr
Mini câble AV
Installation du téléviseur LED
5
Français
Mounting on a wall
Attach an optional wall mount bracket at the rear
of the TV carefully and install the wall mount
bracket on a solid wall perpendicular to the
floor. When you attach the TV to other building
materials, please contact qualified personnel.
LG recommends that wall mounting be
performed by a qualified professional installer.
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
Make sure to use screws and wall mount
bracket that meet the VESA standard. Standard
dimensions for the wall mount kits are described
in the following table.
Separate purchase(Wall Mounting Bracket)
Model
VESA (A x B) 200 x 200
Standard
screw
M4
Number of
screws
2
100 x 100
M4
2
Wall mount bracket
A
B
43”24”/32”
43”24”/32”
(*Not Provided) (*Not Provided)
Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3
24”: Insert 2 screws
32”/43”: Insert 4 screws
1. Place the TV set on soft cloth or cushion with face down.Place the base in position as shown.
2. I ver.
3. Place the TV upward.
FrontBack
2
Installation du téléviseur LED
Fixation du socle
1� Placez le téléviseur sur une éto󰀨e ou un matelas avec la face vers le bas. Placez le socle
dans une position comme illustré�
2� Insérer les vis (fournies) dans les trous de vis, les serrer avec un tournevis.
3� Mettez le téléviseur débout sur son socle�
Mounting on a wall
Attach an optional wall mount bracket at the rear
of the TV carefully and install the wall mount
bracket on a solid wall perpendicular to the
floor. When you attach the TV to other building
materials, please contact qualified personnel.
LG recommends that wall mounting be
performed by a qualified professional installer.
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
Make sure to use screws and wall mount
bracket that meet the VESA standard. Standard
dimensions for the wall mount kits are described
in the following table.
Separate purchase(Wall Mounting Bracket)
Model
VESA (A x B) 200 x 200
Standard
screw
M4
Number of
screws
2
100 x 100
M4
2
Wall mount bracket
A
B
43”24”/32”
43”24”/32”
(*Not Provided) (*Not Provided)
Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3
24”: Insert 2 screws
32”/43”: Insert 4 screws
1. Place the TV set on soft cloth or cushion with face down.Place the base in position as shown.
2. I ver.
3. Place the TV upward.
FrontBack
Figure 1 Figure 2
Arrière Avant
24” : Insérez 2 vis
32”/43” : Insérez 4 vis
Figure 3
Montage mural
Fixez soigneusement un support de montage
mural, en option, à l’arrière du téléviseur et
installez le support mural sur un mur solide
perpendiculaire au sol. Pour la xation du
téléviseur à d’autres matériaux de construction,
contactez un personnel qualié. Nordmende
recommande de coner le montage mural à un
installateur professionnel qualié.
Veillez à utiliser des vis et un support de
montage mural qui répondent à la norme
VESA� Les dimensions standard pour les kits
de montage mural sont décrites dans le tableau
suivant�
Achat séparé (support de montage mural)
Modèle 24”/32” 43”
VESA (A x B) 100 x 100 200 x 200
Vis standard M4 M4
Nombre de vis 2 2
Support de montage mural
24”/32”
(* Non fourni)
43”
(* Non fourni)
Mounting on a wall
Attach an optional wall mount bracket at the rear
of the TV carefully and install the wall mount
bracket on a solid wall perpendicular to the
floor. When you attach the TV to other building
materials, please contact qualified personnel.
LG recommends that wall mounting be
performed by a qualified professional installer.
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
Make sure to use screws and wall mount
bracket that meet the VESA standard. Standard
dimensions for the wall mount kits are described
in the following table.
Separate purchase(Wall Mounting Bracket)
Model
VESA (A x B) 200 x 200
Standard
screw
M4
Number of
screws
2
100 x 100
M4
2
Wall mount bracket
A
B
43”24”/32”
43”24”/32”
(*Not Provided) (*Not Provided)
Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3
24”: Insert 2 screws
32”/43”: Insert 4 screws
1. Place the TV set on soft cloth or cushion with face down.Place the base in position as shown.
2. I ver.
3. Place the TV upward.
FrontBack
Mounting on a wall
Attach an optional wall mount bracket at the rear
of the TV carefully and install the wall mount
bracket on a solid wall perpendicular to the
floor. When you attach the TV to other building
materials, please contact qualified personnel.
LG recommends that wall mounting be
performed by a qualified professional installer.
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
Make sure to use screws and wall mount
bracket that meet the VESA standard. Standard
dimensions for the wall mount kits are described
in the following table.
Separate purchase(Wall Mounting Bracket)
Model
VESA (A x B) 200 x 200
Standard
screw
M4
Number of
screws
2
100 x 100
M4
2
Wall mount bracket
A
B
43”24”/32”
43”24”/32”
(*Not Provided) (*Not Provided)
Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3
24”: Insert 2 screws
32”/43”: Insert 4 screws
1. Place the TV set on soft cloth or cushion with face down.Place the base in position as shown.
2. I ver.
3. Place the TV upward.
FrontBack
Mounting on a wall
Attach an optional wall mount bracket at the rear
of the TV carefully and install the wall mount
bracket on a solid wall perpendicular to the
floor. When you attach the TV to other building
materials, please contact qualified personnel.
LG recommends that wall mounting be
performed by a qualified professional installer.
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
Make sure to use screws and wall mount
bracket that meet the VESA standard. Standard
dimensions for the wall mount kits are described
in the following table.
Separate purchase(Wall Mounting Bracket)
Model
VESA (A x B) 200 x 200
Standard
screw
M4
Number of
screws
2
100 x 100
M4
2
Wall mount bracket
A
B
43”24”/32”
43”24”/32”
(*Not Provided) (*Not Provided)
Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3
24”: Insert 2 screws
32”/43”: Insert 4 screws
1. Place the TV set on soft cloth or cushion with face down.Place the base in position as shown.
2. I ver.
3. Place the TV upward.
FrontBack
6
Français
Description du téléviseur3
Élément Description
1/Alimentation Permet d’allumer le téléviseur et ou le mettre en veille�
2SOURCE Permet de sélectionner la source d'entrée�
3MENU Activer/désactiver le menu OSD�
4 + CH - Chaîne suivante/précédente lorsque la source est TV, ou sélection
d’une commande du menu OSD�
5+ VOL - Augmenter/Diminuer le son ou mettre en surbrillance une
commande du menu OSD�
Composants et touches
7
Français
Connexion d'une antenne 4
CONNEXIONS
Vous pouvez connecter divers appareils
externes au téléviseur et changez de mode
d’entrée pour sélectionner une source externe�
Pour plus d’informations sur la connexion
d’un appareil externe, reportez-vous au guide
d’utilisation fourni avec chaque appareil�
Appareils pouvant être connectés : Récepteurs
HD, lecteurs DVD, systèmes audio, appareils
de stockage USB, PC etc.
Connexion d'une antenne
Utilisez un câble RF (75 Ω) pour connecter le
téléviseur à une prise d’antenne murale�
MAKING CONNECTIONS
Connect various external devices to the TV
and switch input modes to select an external
device. For more information of external devices
connection, refer to the manual provided with
each device.
Available external devices are: HD receivers,
DVD players, audio systems, USB
storage devices, PC, and other external
devices.
NOTE
yThe external device connection may differ
from the model.
yConnect external devices to the TV
regardless of the order of the TV port.
yRefer to the external equipments manual
for operating instructions.
yIn PC mode, there may be noise
associated with the resolution, vertical
pattern, contrast or brightness. If noise is
present, change the PC output to another
resolution, change the refresh rate to
another rate or adjust the brightness and
contrast on the PICTURE menu until the
picture is clear.
yIn PC mode, some resolution settings
may not work properly depending on the
graphics card.
Connect the TV to a wall antenna socket with an
RF cable (75 ).
NOTE
yUse a signal splitter to use more than 2
TVs.
yIf the image quality is poor, install a signal
amplifier properly to improve the image
quality.
yIf the image quality is poor with an
antenna connected, try to realign the
antenna in the correct direction.
yAn antenna cable and converter are not
supplied.
ySupported DTV Audio: MPEG, Dolby
Digital.
Antenna connection
SAT/LNB
AERIAL/
CABLE
Vous pouvez utiliser un coupleur de signal
pour utiliser plus de 2 téléviseurs�
Si la qualité de l’image est mauvaise, installez
un amplicateur de signal pour l’améliorer.
Si la qualité de l’image est mauvaise avec une
antenne connectée, essayez de réorienter
l’antenne dans la bonne direction�
Le l d'antenne et le convertisseur ne sont
pas fournis�
Audio TVN pris en charge : MPEG, Dolby Digital.
REMARQUE
MAKING CONNECTIONS
Connect various external devices to the TV
and switch input modes to select an external
device. For more information of external devices
connection, refer to the manual provided with
each device.
Available external devices are: HD receivers,
DVD players, audio systems, USB
storage devices, PC, and other external
devices.
NOTE
yThe external device connection may differ
from the model.
yConnect external devices to the TV
regardless of the order of the TV port.
yRefer to the external equipments manual
for operating instructions.
yIn PC mode, there may be noise
associated with the resolution, vertical
pattern, contrast or brightness. If noise is
present, change the PC output to another
resolution, change the refresh rate to
another rate or adjust the brightness and
contrast on the PICTURE menu until the
picture is clear.
yIn PC mode, some resolution settings
may not work properly depending on the
graphics card.
Connect the TV to a wall antenna socket with an
RF cable (75 ).
NOTE
yUse a signal splitter to use more than 2
TVs.
yIf the image quality is poor, install a signal
amplifier properly to improve the image
quality.
yIf the image quality is poor with an
antenna connected, try to realign the
antenna in the correct direction.
yAn antenna cable and converter are not
supplied.
ySupported DTV Audio: MPEG, Dolby
Digital.
Antenna connection
SAT/LNB
AERIAL/
CABLE
REMARQUE
La connexion d’un appareil externe peut
di󰀨érer d’un modèle de téléviseur à l’autre.
La connexion des appareils externes au
téléviseur est indépendante de l’ordre des
ports du téléviseur
Reportez-vous au guide de d’utilisation de
l’équipement externe pour les instructions
d’utilisation�
En mode PC, il peut y avoir un bruit associé à la
résolution, au motif vertical, au contraste ou à la
luminosité. En cas de bruit, changez la résolution
de sortie du PC, le taux de rafraîchissement ou
réglez la luminosité et le contraste dans le menu
IMAGE jusqu’à ce que l’image soit claire.
En mode PC, certains paramètres de résolution
peuvent ne pas fonctionner correctement, cela
dépend de la carte graphique.
MAKING CONNECTIONS
Connect various external devices to the TV
and switch input modes to select an external
device. For more information of external devices
connection, refer to the manual provided with
each device.
Available external devices are: HD receivers,
DVD players, audio systems, USB
storage devices, PC, and other external
devices.
NOTE
yThe external device connection may differ
from the model.
yConnect external devices to the TV
regardless of the order of the TV port.
yRefer to the external equipments manual
for operating instructions.
yIn PC mode, there may be noise
associated with the resolution, vertical
pattern, contrast or brightness. If noise is
present, change the PC output to another
resolution, change the refresh rate to
another rate or adjust the brightness and
contrast on the PICTURE menu until the
picture is clear.
yIn PC mode, some resolution settings
may not work properly depending on the
graphics card.
Connect the TV to a wall antenna socket with an
RF cable (75 ).
NOTE
yUse a signal splitter to use more than 2
TVs.
yIf the image quality is poor, install a signal
amplifier properly to improve the image
quality.
yIf the image quality is poor with an
antenna connected, try to realign the
antenna in the correct direction.
yAn antenna cable and converter are not
supplied.
ySupported DTV Audio: MPEG, Dolby
Digital.
Antenna connection
SAT/LNB
AERIAL/
CABLE
ANTENNE/
CÂBLE
SAT/LNB
8
Français
Connexion d’appareils externes
5
Il est recommandé d’éteindre téléviseur lors de connexion d’un appareil externe�
Ce téléviseur peut être utilisé avec di󰀨érentes sources multimédias telles que lecteurs DVD,
ordinateurs, etc. et en sélectionnez une pour la regarder.
CamcorderDVD playerPC (HDMI-output)Blu-ray disc playerAudio system
DVD player with
component output Headphone
USB
ARCSCART
TV
CI SLOT
The sound
system
HDMI1(ARC)
AERIAL/CABLESAT/LNB
VGA IN PC AUDIO IN
USB EARPHONE
HDMI2 HDMI3
MINI AV IN
MINI
YPBPR IN S/PDIF OUT
CI SLOT
SCART IN
Port PC
Lecteur DVD avec
sortie composante
Système audio
Casque
Fente pour carte CI
SCART (Péritel)
TV
ARC
Système audio PC
(sortie HDMI) Lecteur DVD CaméscopeLecteur Blu-ray
USB
9
Français
Utilisation de la télécommande 6
1� Dirigez la télécommande directement vers
le capteur de télécommande situé au coin
inférieur gauche du téléviseur.
2� La portée de la télécommande est d’environ
10 mètres avec un angle d’environ
30 degrés.
3� Évitez tout obstacle entre la télécommande
et le capteur
☼ Retirez les piles si vous n'allez pas utiliser la
télécommande pendant une longue période.
☼ Si la télécommande ne fonctionne pas
correctement ou sa portée est réduite,
remplacez les piles�
Insertion des piles de la télécommande
1� Retirez le couvercle du compartiment à piles en le faisant glisser puis en soulevant.
2� Insérez les piles, en respectant les signes (+) et (-) se trouvant dans le compartiment à piles.
3� Remettez le couvercle du compartiment pour pile�
ATTENTION
N'utilisez que des piles AAA�
Ne mélangez pas des piles usagées et des piles neuves. Cela peut provoquer des ssures ou
des fuites, pouvant provoquer un incendie ou des blessures�
Insérez les piles, en respectant les signes (+) et (-). L’insertion incorrecte des piles peut entraîner
des fuites pouvant provoquer un incendie ou des blessures�
Jetez les piles usagées conformément aux réglementations locales.
Gardez les piles hors de la portée des enfants et des animaux de compagnie.
Retirez les piles de la télécommande si elle ne va pas être utilisée pendant une longue période.
Utilisation de la télécommande
30 30
IR Receiver
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
Récepteur IR
10
Français
Utilisation de la télécommande
6
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
1. Alimentation Appuyez pour accéder/quitter le mode Veille�
2. COUPURE
DU SON Appuyez pour couper/rétablir le son�
3. P.MODE Appuyez pour sélectionner le mode image.
4. S.MODE Appuyez pour changer de mode audio.
5. FAV Appuyez pour ouvrir la liste des chaînes favorites.
6. SLEEP Cette touche permet d’éteindre le téléviseur après un
certain temps prédéni.
7. FREEZE Appuyez pour ger l’image. Appuyez de nouveau pour
libérer l’image.
8. CH.LIST Appuyez pour a󰀩cher la liste des chaînes.
9. AUTO Appuyez pour e󰀨ectuer un réglage automatique en mode
VGA�
10. ASPECT Cette touche permet de changer le mode d’a󰀩chage du
téléviseur
11. 0-9 Appuyez pour changer de chaîne télé.
12. -/-- Appuyez sur cette touche avant d’entrer un numéro de
chaîne supérieur à 9.
13.
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
Appuyez pour retourner à la dernière regardée.
14. MENU Cette touche ouvre le menu OSD (A󰀩chage à l'écran).
15. EXIT Cette touche permet de quitter le menu OSD�
16. ▲▼◄► Utilisez les touches de direction pour sélectionner des
options ou paramètres de menu�
17. OK Touche de conrmation, sélection d’option du menu OSD.
18. SOURCE Appuyez pour a󰀩cher et sélectionner une source vidéo
disponible�
19. DISPLAY Appuyez pour a󰀩cher la fenêtre d’information.
20. CH (+/-) Ces deux touches permettent d’aller à la chaîne télé
précédente/suivante�
21. VOL (+/-) Ces deux touches permettent d’augmenter/diminuer le
volume du téléviseur
22. TEXT Permet d’ouvrir le mode télétexte�
23. EPG Appuyez pour ouvrir le guide électronique des programmes.
24. AUDIO Appuyez sur Audio pour passer en mode PAL-BG/Stéréo
ou PAL-BG Momo (TVA) et changer de langue audio.
25. SUBTITLE Ouvre le menu des sous-titres pour la sélection�
26. INDEX
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
A󰀩che une liste et des informations sur les pages télétexte.
Pour lire le chapitre, titre ou morceau précédent�
27. HOLD
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
Fige la page télétexte actuelle à l’écran.
Pour lire le chapitre, titre ou morceau suivant�
28. SIZE
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
Vous pouvez changer la taille de l’image en mode télétexte.
Appuyez pour e󰀨ectuer une recherche des stations vers
l'arrière�
29. REVEAL
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
A󰀩che/masque les contenus cachés en mode télétexte.
Appuyez pour e󰀨ectuer une recherche des stations vers
l'avant�
30. TIMESHIFT
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
Démarre la fonction time-shift (lecture décalée).
Appuyez pour regarder ou arrêter le programme en cours.
31. LIST
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
A󰀩che la liste des chiers PVR.
Appuyez pour regarder ou arrêter le programme en cours.
32.
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
Appuyez pour lancer l'enregistrement.
33. SUBPAGE A󰀩che le sous-menu du mode télétexte.
34. Couleur Dépend de la requête OSD.
11
Français
Allumer et éteindre le téléviseur
Appuyez sur la touche Alimentation de la télécommande�
Vous pouvez également utiliser la touche alimentation située
en bas/sur le côté du panneau�
* Le téléviseur s’éteint automatiquement s’il ne reçoit aucun
signal d’entrée pendant 15 minutes.
Première conguration
Connectez un câble RF entre l’entrée du téléviseur « RF-In » et la prise d’antenne télé murale�
Choix d’une langue
Utilisez les touches ◄/► pour choisir la langue des menus et des messages.
Choix d’un pays
Utilisez les touches ▼/▲ pour ouvrir le menu pays.
Utilisez les touches ◄/► pour choisir un pays.
OK
Germany
Environment
Digital Type
Home Mode
DVB-T
Recherche automatique
Pour e󰀨ectuer une recherche des chaînes analogiques, appuyez sur Menu puis sur la èche gauche,
pour e󰀨ectuer une recherche des chaînes numériques, appuyez sur Menu puis sur la èche gauche.
Thailand
OK
Changer de chaîne
1� Utilisation des touches de chaîne
Utilisez les touches CH +/- pour changer de chaîne. Toutes les
chaînes mémorisées seront a󰀩chées. Les chaînes e󰀨acées ou
non mémorisées ne seront pas a󰀩chées.
* Appuyez sur la touche pour retourner à la chaîne
précédente�
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
MENU EXIT
FREEZE
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
+
SOURCE
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
LIST
Utilisation de base du téléviseur 7
12
Français
Réglage du volume
Utilisez les touches VOL +/- pour régler le volume.
Appuyez sur COUPER LE SON pour réduire le
volume à zéro�
Pour rétablir le son, appuyez de nouveau sur
COUPER LE SON ou sur VOL +
Sélection d'une source d'entrée
Pour sélectionner la source d'entrée TV ou externe connectée
au poste TV
1� Appuyez sur la touche Source pour a󰀩cher la liste des
sources d'entrée�
2� Utilisez les touches ▼/▲ ou SOURCE pour sélectionner
une source d’entrée� (Satellite, TVN, TVA, AV, PC,
SCART, Composant, HDMI, Multimédia).
3� Appuyez sur la touche OK pour accéder la source
d’entrée�
4� Appuyez sur la touche EXIT pour quitter
+
SOURCE
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
LIST
OK
HDMI3
Utilisation de base du téléviseur
7
13
Français
Utilisation des menus 8
Les étapes suivantes doivent être utilisées dans les réglages des menus dans les chapitres
suivants. Gardez les opérations en tête.
Les instructions et les diagrammes des réglages des menus sont généralement e󰀨ectués dans
la source du signal télé. Les exceptions seront indiquées séparément.
Certains éléments ne sont pas réglables dans di󰀨érentes sources de signal.
Accès au menu
Appuyez sur la touche [MENU] pour a󰀩cher le menu principal.
Utilisez les touches [◄/►] pour sélectionner un menu du menu principal.
Appuyez sur [OK] ou [▼/▲] pour accéder au menu.
Utilisation des menus
[▼/▲] : Utilisez ces touches pour sélectionner l'option à régler dans le menu.
[◄/►] : E󰀨ectuer un réglage ou accéder à un sous-menu.
[OK] : accéder à un sous-menu ou conrmer.
Quitter un menu
Appuyez sur la touche [MENU] pour retourner au menu précédent ou quitter le menu ; appuyez
sur [EXIT] pour quitter le menu�
Ce menu n’est disponible qu'en mode TV
CHAÎNES
Menu Chaînes
1� Recherche automatique
Utilisez les touches ▼/▲ pour sélectionner Recherche automatique, puis appuyez sur OK/►
pour accéder
2� Recherche manuelle des chaînes analogiques
Utilisez les touches ▼/▲ pour sélectionner Recherche manuelle des chaînes analogiques, puis
appuyez sur OK pour accéder au sous-menu. Utilisez les touches ◄/► pour sélectionner une
chaîne, puis appuyez sur OK pour rechercher les programmes.
3� Recherche manuelle des chaînes numériques
Utilisez les touches ▼/▲ pour sélectionner Recherche manuelle des chaînes numériques, puis
appuyez sur OK pour accéder au sous-menu. Utilisez les touches ◄/► pour sélectionner une
chaîne, puis appuyez sur OK pour rechercher les programmes.
4� Modication de programme
Utilisez les touches ▼/▲ pour sélectionner Modication de programme, puis appuyez sur OK
pour accéder au sous-menu�
5� Liste des programmes
Utilisez les touches ▼/▲ pour sélectionner Liste des programmes, puis appuyez sur OK pour
accéder au sous-menu� Disponible dans la source�
6� Informations sur le signal
Utilisez les touches ▼/▲ pour sélectionner Informations sur le signal, appuyez sur OK pour avoir
des informations détaillées sur le signal. Disponible uniquement lorsque le signal est en TVN.
7� Informations sur la CI
Utilisez les touches ▼/▲ pour sélectionner Informations sur la CI, puis appuyez sur OK pour
accéder au sous-menu�
14
Français
IMAGE Les options de réglage disponibles peuvent varier avec les sources
de signal, mais le principe est le même.
Menu Image
1. Mode Image
Utilisez les touches ▼/▲ pour sélectionner Mode Image, puis appuyez sur OK pour accéder au
sous-menu. Vous pouvez changer la valeur de contraste, luminosité, couleur, netteté et teinte en
mode personnalisé�
2. Contraste/Luminosité/Couleur/Teinte/Netteté
Ces paramètres ne peuvent être réglés que si le mode Image est sur User
Utilisez les touches ▼/▲ pour sélectionner une option, puis utilisez les touches ◄/► pour
e󰀨ectuer les réglages.
3. Température de couleur
Utilisez les touches ▼/▲ pour sélectionner Température de couleur, puis appuyez sur OK pour
accéder au sous-menu�
Utilisez les touches ▼/▲ pour sélectionner. (Options disponibles : Froid, Normal, Chaud).
4. Réduction de bruit
Pour ltrer et réduit le bruit de l’image et améliorer la qualité de l’image.
Utilisez les touches ▼/▲ pour sélectionner Réduction de bruit puis appuyez sur OK pour accéder
au sous-menu�
5. Mode HDMI
Utilisez les touches ▼/▲ pour sélectionner Mode HDMI, puis appuyez sur OK pour accéder au
sous-menu�
SON
Menu Son
1. Mode sonore
Sélectionnez le mode sonore qui vous convient. Les aigus et les graves ne sont disponibles
qu’en mode Personnalisé, vous pouvez les régler selon vos goûts personnels.
2. Aigus/Graves
Utilisez les touches ▼/▲ pour sélectionner une option, puis ◄/► pour e󰀨ectuer les réglages.
Les aigus et les graves ne sont disponibles qu’en mode Personnalisé, vous pouvez les régler
selon vos goûts personnels.
3. Balance
Utilisez les touches ▼/▲ pour sélectionner une option, puis ◄/► pour e󰀨ectuer les réglages.
4. Niveau de volume automatique
Utilisez les touches ▼/▲ pour sélectionner Niveau de volume automatique, puis appuyez sur la
touche OK pour sélectionner Activé ou Désactivé�
5. Mode SPDIF
Utilisez les touches ▼/▲ pour sélectionner Mode SPDIF, puis sur OK pour sélectionner
Désactivé/PCM/Auto�
6. Commutateur Publicité
Utilisez les touches ▼/▲ pour sélectionner Commutateur Publicité, puis sur OK pour
sélectionner Activé ou Désactivé. La fonction Amblyopie pour les personnes décientes visuelles,
permet de décrire vocalement les scènes vidéo� La voix décrit les éléments purement visuels�
Remarque :
Balance : Cette option permet de régler la sortie du haut-parleur.
Volume automatique : Cette option permet de réduire automatiquement la di󰀨érence entre le
volume de la chaîne et celui du programme.
8Utilisation des menus
15
Français
Utilisation des menus 8
Heure
Menu Temps
1. Horloge
Utilisez les touches ▼/▲ pour sélectionner Jour/Mois/Année/Heures/Minutes.
Utilisez les touches ▼/▲ pour régler l’horloge.
2. Fuseau horaire
Utilisez les touches ▼/▲ pour sélectionner Fuseau horaire, puis appuyez sur OK pour accéder
au sous-menu�
3. Minuteur de veille automatique
Sélectionnez le délai en minutes au bout duquel le téléviseur s’éteint automatiquement� Vous
pouvez l’annuler en éteignant le téléviseur.
4. Veille automatique
Utilisez les touches ▼/▲ pour sélectionner Veille automatique, puis appuyez sur OK pour
accéder au sous-menu�
La télécommande ne permet de faire aucune opération dans le menu Temps, elle sera
automatiquement désactivée� Si vous faites une opération, le temps sera réinitialisé�
5. Minuteur OSD
Utilisez les touches ▼/▲ pour sélectionner Minuteur OSD, puis appuyez sur OK pour accéder au
sous-menu�
REMARQUE :
L’heure change avec la zone que vous avez sélectionnée dans Fuseau horaire.
Verrouiller
Menu Verrouillage
1. Verrouillage du système
Utilisez les touches ▼/▲ pour sélectionner Verrouillage du système, puis appuyez sur la touche
OK pour valider les 3 options suivantes� Le mot de passe par défaut est 0000, en cas d’oubli,
appelez le service clientèle�
2. Dénir un mot de passe
Utilisez les touches ▼/▲ pour sélectionner Dénir un mot de passe, puis appuyez sur OK pour
accéder au sous-menu�
3. Verrouillage des chaînes
Utilisez les touches ▼/▲ pour sélectionner Verrouillage des chaînes, puis appuyez sur OK pour
accéder au sous-menu. Appuyez sur le bouton Vert pour verrouiller/déverrouiller une chaîne.
4. Contrôle parental
Utilisez les touches ▼/▲ pour sélectionner Contrôle parental, puis appuyez sur OK pour accéder
au sous-menu et sélectionner l’âge adapté à vos enfants.
5. Verrouillage des touches
Utilisez les touches ▼/▲ pour sélectionner Verrouillage des touches, puis utilisez les touches
◄/► pour sélectionner Activé ou Désactivé.
Lorsque le verrouillage des touches est activé, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser celles du téléviseur.
6. Mode Hôtel
Utilisez les touches ▼/▲ pour sélectionner Mode Hôtel, puis sur OK pour sélectionner Activé ou
Désactivé�
16
Français
Utilisation des menus
8
CONFIGURATION
Menu De Conguration
1. Langue
Permet de choisir la langue d’a󰀩chage.
2. Langue de Télétexte
Utilisez les touches ▼/▲ pour sélectionner Langue de Télétexte, puis appuyez sur OK pour
accéder au sous-menu�
3. Langue audio
Utilisez les touches ▼/▲ pour sélectionner Langue audio, puis appuyez sur OK pour accéder au
sous-menu�
4. Langue de sous-titrage
Utilisez les touches ▼/▲ pour sélectionner Langue de sous-titrage, puis appuyez sur OK pour
accéder au sous-menu�
5. Malentendants
Utilisez les touches ▼/▲ pour sélectionner Malentendants, puis utilisez les touches ◄/► pour
sélectionner Activé ou Désactivé�
6. Système de chiers PVR
Utilisez les touches ▼/▲ pour sélectionner Système de chiers PVR, puis appuyez sur OK pour
accéder au sous-menu�
Utilisez les touches ▼/▲ pour sélectionner Vérier le système de chiers PVR, puis appuyez sur
la touche OK pour accéder. La vitesse USB sera vériée.
7. Format d'image
Dénit le format d'image à l'écran.
8. Écran Bleu
Permet de choisir une couleur, bleue ou noire, pour l’écran lorsqu’il n’y a pas de signal d’entrée.
9. Première installation
Utilisez les touches ▼/▲ pour sélectionner Première installation, puis appuyez sur OK pour accéder.
10. Réinitialiser
Utilisez les touches ▼/▲ pour sélectionner Réinitialiser, puis appuyez sur OK pour accéder au
sous-menu�
11. Mise à jour du logiciel (USB)
Utilisez les touches ▼/▲ pour sélectionner Mise à jour du logiciel (USB), insérez une clé USB
dans le port USB, puis appuyez sur OK pour mettre à jour le logiciel.
12. HDMI CEC
Utilisez les touches ▼/▲ pour sélectionner HDMI CEC, puis appuyez sur OK pour accéder au
sous-menu�
13. Environnement
Utilisez les touches ▼/▲ pour sélectionner Environnement, puis les touches ◄/► pour
sélectionner Mode maison ou Mode magasin.
17
Français
Multimédia 9
Remarque : Avant l’utilisation de menu Multimédia, insérez un dispositif USB, puis appuyez sur
SOURCE pour régler la source d’entrée sur Multimédia.
Utilisez les touches ▼/▲ pour sélectionner Multimédia dans le menu Source, puis appuyez sur la
touche OK pour accéder
Une fois le téléviseur a reconnu les appareils de stockage USB, utilisez ◄/► pour sélectionner
photo/musique/lm/texte, et appuyez sur OK pour e󰀨ectuer des opérations élémentaires dessus.
jlbhd.jpg
Pause
Info.
jlbhd.jpg
Play
Play
Aa
Char Set 1
Time 14:30:58
Date Fri Mar 14, 2014
-----------------------------------
-----------------------------------
------
-----------------------------------
-----------------------------------
------
Music Playlist
Aa
Char Set
Previous P...
1� Utilisez ◄/► pour choisir un sous-dossier si nécessaire, puis appuyez sur OK pour y accéder.
Appuyez sur la touche OK pour lancer la lecture, appuyez sur Exit pour retournerAppuyez
sur OK pour sélectionner le dossier vers le haut et retourner au menu de niveau précédent,
utilisez ◄/► pour tourner les pages.
2� Appuyez sur ► pour lancer/suspendre la lecture� Appuyez sur pour arrêter la lecture.
3� Appuyez sur la touche pour lire l'élément précédent� Appuyez sur la touche pour lire
l'élément suivant�
18
Français
Précautions lors de l’utilisation d’un appareil USB
Le protocole MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) n’est pas pris en charge.
Capacité maximale du disque dur : 500Go�
Cette unité prend en charge uniquement des clés USB au format FAT32. Ce téléviseur ne garantit
pas une compatibilité avec les clés USB ayant d’autres formats (tels que FAT16 ou NTFS).
Certains types de caméras et d’appareils audio USB peuvent ne pas être compatibles avec ce
téléviseur. Le multimédia ne peut être utilisé qu’à partir de clés USB. D’autres appareils tels que
cartes ash, disques durs, caméras et appareils audio USB peuvent ne pas être compatibles
avec ce téléviseur
Si un appareil USB nécessite une alimentation élevée (plus de 500mA ou 5V), il risque de ne pas
être pris en charge.
Ce téléviseur ne prend pas en charge des appareils USB avec plusieurs partitions.
Connectez directement l'appareil USB au port USB du téléviseur� Si vous utilisez un câble de
connexion distinct ou un concentrateur USB, il peut y avoir un problème de compatibilité�
Avant de connecter votre appareil au téléviseur, sauvegardez vos chiers pour éviter tout
dommage ou perte de données. Tout dommage au chier ou perte de données est à vos risques
et périls�
Plus la résolution de l’image est élevée, plus elle nécessite de temps à être a󰀩chée.
La vitesse d’un appareil USB est di󰀨ère d’un appareil à l’autre.
Le message « unsupported File (Fichier non prise en charge) » s’a󰀩che lorsque le chier est
corrompu ou non pris en charge.
Les chiers MP3 avec gestion des droits numériques (DRM) téléchargés à partir d’un site
payant ne peuvent pas être lus. La technologie DRM (Gestion des droits numériques) prend en
charge la création, la distribution et la gestion de contenus de manière complètement intégrée,
surtout en ce qui concerne la protection des droits et des intérêts des fournisseurs de contenus,
la prévention de la copie illégale des contenus, ainsi que la gestion de la facturation et des
règlements.
Le chargement d’une image ne prend que quelques secondes. À ce stade, l’icône de l’image
chargée apparaît sur l’écran.
Si un lecteur de cartes USB est connecté, son volume peut ne pas être détecté.
Si un appareil USB ne fonctionne pas correctement, le retirer puis l’insérer de nouveau�
Autrement, vériez si l’appareil USB fonctionne correctement avec un PC.
TYPE FICHIER EXTENSION DE FICHIER
Image JPEG .jpg, .jpeg
BMP .bmp
Audio MP3 .mp3
Vidéo MP4 .mp4
MPG .mpg
9Multimédia
19
Français
Dépannage 10
Consultez le guide de dépannage suivant avant d'appeler le service à la clientèle. Si un problème
persiste, débranchez le téléviseur et appelez le service à la clientèle�
Symptôme Liste de contrôle
Pas d’image, pas de son Vériez si l’interrupteur d’alimentation du téléviseur est
positionné sur marche�
Vériez la connexion du câble d’alimentation et/ou
d’autres câbles�
Image normale, pas de son Vériez le niveau de volume.
Vériez si la touche
Select “Auto Adjust“ to adjust the image.
a été appuyée�
Vériez la connexion de l'appareil externe.
Mauvaise couleur ou pas
de couleur, son normal
Vériez le niveau de « Luminosité » et de « Contraste »
dans le menu IMAGE�
Images multiples, son normal Vériez la connexion et la direction de l’antenne.
Réglage précis du téléviseur
Vériez la connexion de l'appareil externe.
La station télé peut avoir des problèmes de di󰀨usion.
Essayez une autre chaîne.
Image neigeuse,
son de mauvaise qualité
Vériez la connexion et la direction de l’antenne.
La station télé peut avoir des problèmes de di󰀨usion.
Essayez une autre chaîne.
Interférence intermittente Vériez si la source d’interférence est bien isolée.
Déconnectez de tels appareils électriques du téléviseur
Son stéréo de mauvaise qualité La station télé peut avoir des problèmes de di󰀨usion.
Essayez en passant en mode mono�
La télécommande ne marche pas� Vériez si les piles sont correctement installées.
Les piles peuvent être à plat. Les remplacer avec des
piles neuves�
Éloignez tout objet faisant obstacle entre la télécommande
et le capteur
Assurez-vous que le capteur de la télécommande n’est
pas soumis à une forte lumière�
« No Signal » apparaît sur l’écran Le téléviseur ne détecte aucun signal provenant de ports
d’entrée�
Vériez si le câble est correctement connecté.
Vériez si les appareils externes sont allumés.
« No Signal » ou « Unsupported
Signal » apparaît à l’écran
(mode RGB uniquement)
Vériez si la résolution et la fréquence d’a󰀩chage de votre
PC est compatible avec le téléviseur� Reportez-vous au
tableau concernant le signal d’entrée RGB recommandé.
Image non centrée
(mode PC uniquement)
Sélectionnez « Réglage automatique » pour centrer
l’image.
20
Français
Spécications
11
Modèle 24 32 43
Taille du panneau LED
(rétroéclairage LED) 23,8” 32” 43”
Résolution native 1920 × 1080 1920 × 1080 1920 × 1080
Systèmes vidéo (RF) PAL, SECAM PAL, SECAM PAL, SECAM
Système sonore (RF) D/K, I , BG D/K, I , BG D/K, I , BG
Haut-parleurs intégrés 2,5 W x 2 6 W x 2 8 W x 2
Consommation
électrique en veille ≤0,50 W ≤0,50 W ≤0,50 W
Alimentation électrique
Reportez-vous à
l’étiquette au dos
du téléviseur
Reportez-vous à
l’étiquette au dos
du téléviseur
Reportez-vous à
l’étiquette au dos
du téléviseur
Consommation
électrique
Reportez-vous à
l’étiquette au dos
du téléviseur
Reportez-vous à
l’étiquette au dos
du téléviseur
Reportez-vous à
l’étiquette au dos
du téléviseur
Signaux pris en charge
YPbPr VGA HDMI (DVI)
480i 640X480 480i
576i 800X600 576i
480P 1024X768 480P
576P 1366X768 576P
720P 1920X1080 720P
1080i 1080i
1080P 1080P
REMARQUE : Le design et les spécications sont susceptibles d'être modiés sans préavis.
Mise au rebut
Packaging
The product has been packaged to protect it from damage in transit. The packaging is made
of materials that can be recycled in an environmentally friendly manner.
Device
Old devices should not be disposed of with the normal household rubbish. In accordance
with Directive 2012/19/EU, the device must be properly disposed of at the end of its service
life. This involves separating the materials in the device for the purpose of recycling and pre-
venting any impact on the environment. Take old devices to a collection point for electrical
scrap or a recycling centre. Contact your local waste disposal company or your local authori-
ty for more information on this subject.
Batteries
Do not dispose of used batteries in the household rubbish! They should be taken to a collec-
tion point for used batteries.
Emballage
Le produit a été emballé de manière à être protégé contre tout dommage pendant le
transport. L’emballage est constitué de matériaux pouvant être recyclés de manière
écologique.
Packaging
The product has been packaged to protect it from damage in transit. The packaging is made
of materials that can be recycled in an environmentally friendly manner.
Device
Old devices should not be disposed of with the normal household rubbish. In accordance
with Directive 2012/19/EU, the device must be properly disposed of at the end of its service
life. This involves separating the materials in the device for the purpose of recycling and pre-
venting any impact on the environment. Take old devices to a collection point for electrical
scrap or a recycling centre. Contact your local waste disposal company or your local authori-
ty for more information on this subject.
Batteries
Do not dispose of used batteries in the household rubbish! They should be taken to a collec-
tion point for used batteries.
Appareils
Les appareils usés ne doivent pas être jetés avec les ordures ménagères.
Conformément à la directive 2012/19/UE, à la n de sa durée de vie, l’appareil doit
être mis au rebut de manière légale. Cela implique une séparation des matériaux
constituant l’appareil à des ns de recyclage pour éviter les e󰀨ets potentiels sur
l’environnement� Ramenez vos appareils usés à un point de collecte des déchets
électriques ou à un centre de recyclage. Pour plus d’informations sur ce sujet,
contactez les autorités locales ou l’entreprise de collecte des déchets�
Packaging
The product has been packaged to protect it from damage in transit. The packaging is made
of materials that can be recycled in an environmentally friendly manner.
Device
Old devices should not be disposed of with the normal household rubbish. In accordance
with Directive 2012/19/EU, the device must be properly disposed of at the end of its service
life. This involves separating the materials in the device for the purpose of recycling and pre-
venting any impact on the environment. Take old devices to a collection point for electrical
scrap or a recycling centre. Contact your local waste disposal company or your local authori-
ty for more information on this subject.
Batteries
Do not dispose of used batteries in the household rubbish! They should be taken to a collec-
tion point for used batteries.
Piles
Ne jetez pas les piles avec les ordures ménagères ! Elles doivent être ramenées à un
point de collecte des piles usées�
1
Italiano
Indice
1. Informazioni importanti sulla sicurezza .................................................................. 2
ATTENZIONE ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������2
2. Installazione della TV LED ....................................................................................... 4
Accessori ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 4
Montaggio del supporto ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 5
3. Panoramica del televisore ........................................................................................ 6
Parti e pulsanti ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������6
4. Collegamento dell'antenna ...................................................................................... 7
5. Collegamento di dispositivi esterni ........................................................................ 8
6. Uso del telecomando ................................................................................................ 9
Inserimento delle batterie del telecomando �������������������������������������������������������������������������������9
Funzionamento del telecomando ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������9
7. Funzionamento base della TV ............................................................................... 11
Accensione e spegnimento della TV ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������11
Prima congurazione ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 11
Stato di sintonizzazione automatica ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 11
Cambio dei canali �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 11
Regolazione del volume ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������12
Selezione della sorgente di ingresso ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������12
8. Funzionamento menu ............................................................................................. 13
Menu Dei Canali ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 13
Menu Immagine ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 14
Menu Audio����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 14
Menu Ora�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 15
Menu Di Bloccoo �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 15
Menu Di Congurazione ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 16
9. Multimedia ............................................................................................................... 17
10. Risoluzione dei problemi ....................................................................................... 19
11. Speciche ................................................................................................................ 20
Segnali di supporto ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������20
Smaltimento�����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������20
2
Italiano
Informazioni importanti sulla sicurezza
1
ATTENZIONE
1� Leggere le istruzioni�
2� Conservare le istruzioni�
3� Osservare tutte le avvertenze�
4� Seguire tutte le istruzioni�
5� Non utilizzare il televisore in prossimità di acqua�
6� Pulire solamente con un panno asciutto�
7� Non ostruire le aperture d'aerazione� Installare secondo le istruzioni del fabbricante�
8� Non installare vicino a fonti di calore come radiatori, termosifoni, stufe, o altri apparecchi
(inclusi gli amplicatori) che producono calore.
9� Non lasciare che il cavo di alimentazione venga calpestato o schiacciato specialmente in
corrispondenza della spina, di prese a parete e dei punti di uscita dall'apparecchiatura�
10� Utilizzare solamente accessori specicati dal fabbricante.
11� Utilizzare solamente con il carrello, il supporto, il treppiede, la sta󰀨a, o il tavolo specicati dal
fabbricante, o con l'apparecchiatura venduta� Se si utilizza un carrello, fare attenzione quando
viene spostato insieme all'apparecchiatura per evitare ribaltamenti�
12� Scollegare il televisore durante i temporali o quando non viene utilizzato per lunghi periodi di
tempo�
13� Per l'assistenza rivolgersi a personale qualicato. L'assistenza è necessaria quando
l'apparecchiatura viene danneggiata per qualsiasi motivo, ad esempio quando il cavo di
alimentazione o la spina vengono danneggiati, quando fuoriesce del liquido oppure se sono
caduti oggetti sopra l'apparecchiatura: oppure se l'apparecchiatura è stata esposta a pioggia
o umidità e non funziona correttamente, o se è stata fatta cadere.
14� ATTENZIONE: Per ridurre il rischio di incendio o scosse elettriche, non esporre il televisore a
pioggia o umidità�
15� L'apparecchiatura non deve essere esposta a gocciolamenti o schizzi e nessun oggetto
contenente liquido, come vasi, deve essere collocato in prossimità dell'apparecchiatura�
16� La spina di alimentazione o l'accoppiatore dell'apparecchiatura devono rimanere facilmente
utilizzabili�
17� Utilizzo in luoghi esterni: Questa TV non è progettata per essere installata in luoghi esterni.
Non esporre il televisore alla pioggia, poiché ciò potrebbe causare un incendio o una scossa
elettrica� Ugualmente, non esporre il televisore alla luce solare diretta, poiché il televisore
potrebbe riscaldarsi e danneggiarsi�
Sicurezza:
PER RIDURRE IL RISCHIO DI SCOSSA ELETTRICA NON
RIMUOVERE IL COPERCHIO (O LATO POSTERIORE).
ALL'INTERNO NON SONO PRESENTI PARTI RIPARABILI
DALL'UTENTE� RIVOLGERSI SOLAMENTE A PERSONALE
QUALIFICATO�
Tensione pericolosa: Il simbolo con la punta a freccia all'interno di
un triangolo equilatero, avverte l'utente della presenza di tensioni
pericolose all'interno del prodotto che potrebbero raggiungere
un livello tale da costituire un pericolo di scossa elettrica per le
persone�
Istruzioni:
Il punto esclamativo all'interno di un triangolo equilatero,
avverte l'utente della presenza nella documentazione allegata
di importanti istruzioni per il funzionamento e la manutenzione
dell'apparecchiatura�
3
Italiano
Informazioni importanti sulla sicurezza 1
Attenzione
AVVERTENZA!
Non collocare mai il televisore in una posizione instabile� Il televisore potrebbe cadere, causando
gravi lesioni personali o la morte� Molti incidenti, specialmente nei confronti dei bambini, possono
essere evitati adottando delle semplici precauzioni come quelle seguenti:
* Utilizzare mobiletti o supporti consigliati dal fabbricante del televisore�
* Utilizzare solamente mobili che possono fungere da sostegno per il televisore in modo sicuro�
* Assicurarsi che il televisore non sporga oltre il bordo del mobile di sostegno�
* Non collocare il televisore su mobili alti (come credenze o librerie) senza che il televisore e i
mobili vengano assicurati entrambi ad un supporto appropriato�
* Non posizionare il televisore su tessuto o altri materiali che possono essere collocati tra il
televisore ed il mobile di sostegno�
* Spiegare ai bambini i rischi che corrono arrampicandosi sul mobile per raggiungere il televisore
o i suoi comandi�
Se si possiede già un televisore che viene conservato e collocato altrove, dovranno essere
applicate le stesse considerazioni�
4
Italiano
2
Accessori
Assicurarsi che insieme alla TV LED siano presenti i seguenti componenti�
Se manca uno di questi componenti, contattare il proprio rivenditore�
Telecomando 2 batterie Istruzioni per il montaggio
TV LED
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/- -
TIMESHIFT
LIST
Cavo YPbPr mini
Cavo AV mini
Installazione della TV LED
5
Italiano
Mounting on a wall
Attach an optional wall mount bracket at the rear
of the TV carefully and install the wall mount
bracket on a solid wall perpendicular to the
floor. When you attach the TV to other building
materials, please contact qualified personnel.
LG recommends that wall mounting be
performed by a qualified professional installer.
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
Make sure to use screws and wall mount
bracket that meet the VESA standard. Standard
dimensions for the wall mount kits are described
in the following table.
Separate purchase(Wall Mounting Bracket)
Model
VESA (A x B) 200 x 200
Standard
screw
M4
Number of
screws
2
100 x 100
M4
2
Wall mount bracket
A
B
43”24”/32”
43”24”/32”
(*Not Provided) (*Not Provided)
Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3
24”: Insert 2 screws
32”/43”: Insert 4 screws
1. Place the TV set on soft cloth or cushion with face down.Place the base in position as shown.
2. I ver.
3. Place the TV upward.
FrontBack
2
Installazione della TV LED
Montaggio del supporto
1� Collocare il televisore con il lato superiore rivolto verso il basso su un panno morbido o su un
cuscino� Posizionare la base come mostrato�
2� Inserire le viti (fornite) negli appositi fori, ssare con un cacciavite.
3� Posizionare il televisore in posizione eretta�
Mounting on a wall
Attach an optional wall mount bracket at the rear
of the TV carefully and install the wall mount
bracket on a solid wall perpendicular to the
floor. When you attach the TV to other building
materials, please contact qualified personnel.
LG recommends that wall mounting be
performed by a qualified professional installer.
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
Make sure to use screws and wall mount
bracket that meet the VESA standard. Standard
dimensions for the wall mount kits are described
in the following table.
Separate purchase(Wall Mounting Bracket)
Model
VESA (A x B) 200 x 200
Standard
screw
M4
Number of
screws
2
100 x 100
M4
2
Wall mount bracket
A
B
43”24”/32”
43”24”/32”
(*Not Provided) (*Not Provided)
Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3
24”: Insert 2 screws
32”/43”: Insert 4 screws
1. Place the TV set on soft cloth or cushion with face down.Place the base in position as shown.
2. I ver.
3. Place the TV upward.
FrontBack
Figura 1 Figura 2
Retro Fronte
24”: Inserire 2 viti
32” / 43”: Inserire 4 viti
Figura 3
Montaggio a parete
Eventualmente collegare con cautela una
sta󰀨a a parete sul retro della TV e montare
la sta󰀨a a parete su una parete solida
perpendicolare al pavimento� Se si monta la
TV su altri materiali da costruzione, contattare
il personale qualicato. Nordmende consiglia
di far e󰀨ettuare il montaggio da un installatore
professionale qualicato.
Assicurarsi di utilizzare viti e sta󰀨e di montaggio
a parete conformi allo standard VESA� Le
dimensioni standard dei kit di montaggio a
parete sono descritti nella tabella seguente�
Da acquistare separatamente
(Sta󰀨a di montaggio a parete)
Modello 24” / 32” 43”
VESA (A x B) 100 x 100 200 x 200
Vite standard M4 M4
Numero di viti 2 2
Sta󰀨a di montaggio a parete
24” / 32”
(*Non fornita)
43”
(*Non fornita)
Mounting on a wall
Attach an optional wall mount bracket at the rear
of the TV carefully and install the wall mount
bracket on a solid wall perpendicular to the
floor. When you attach the TV to other building
materials, please contact qualified personnel.
LG recommends that wall mounting be
performed by a qualified professional installer.
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
Make sure to use screws and wall mount
bracket that meet the VESA standard. Standard
dimensions for the wall mount kits are described
in the following table.
Separate purchase(Wall Mounting Bracket)
Model
VESA (A x B) 200 x 200
Standard
screw
M4
Number of
screws
2
100 x 100
M4
2
Wall mount bracket
A
B
43”24”/32”
43”24”/32”
(*Not Provided) (*Not Provided)
Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3
24”: Insert 2 screws
32”/43”: Insert 4 screws
1. Place the TV set on soft cloth or cushion with face down.Place the base in position as shown.
2. I ver.
3. Place the TV upward.
FrontBack
Mounting on a wall
Attach an optional wall mount bracket at the rear
of the TV carefully and install the wall mount
bracket on a solid wall perpendicular to the
floor. When you attach the TV to other building
materials, please contact qualified personnel.
LG recommends that wall mounting be
performed by a qualified professional installer.
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
Make sure to use screws and wall mount
bracket that meet the VESA standard. Standard
dimensions for the wall mount kits are described
in the following table.
Separate purchase(Wall Mounting Bracket)
Model
VESA (A x B) 200 x 200
Standard
screw
M4
Number of
screws
2
100 x 100
M4
2
Wall mount bracket
A
B
43”24”/32”
43”24”/32”
(*Not Provided) (*Not Provided)
Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3
24”: Insert 2 screws
32”/43”: Insert 4 screws
1. Place the TV set on soft cloth or cushion with face down.Place the base in position as shown.
2. I ver.
3. Place the TV upward.
FrontBack
Mounting on a wall
Attach an optional wall mount bracket at the rear
of the TV carefully and install the wall mount
bracket on a solid wall perpendicular to the
floor. When you attach the TV to other building
materials, please contact qualified personnel.
LG recommends that wall mounting be
performed by a qualified professional installer.
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
Make sure to use screws and wall mount
bracket that meet the VESA standard. Standard
dimensions for the wall mount kits are described
in the following table.
Separate purchase(Wall Mounting Bracket)
Model
VESA (A x B) 200 x 200
Standard
screw
M4
Number of
screws
2
100 x 100
M4
2
Wall mount bracket
A
B
43”24”/32”
43”24”/32”
(*Not Provided) (*Not Provided)
Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3
24”: Insert 2 screws
32”/43”: Insert 4 screws
1. Place the TV set on soft cloth or cushion with face down.Place the base in position as shown.
2. I ver.
3. Place the TV upward.
FrontBack
6
Italiano
Panoramica del televisore3
Componente Descrizione
1/ALIMENTAZIONE Accendere la TV o attivare la modalità standby
2SOURCE Selezionare la sorgente di ingresso�
3MENU Attivare/Disattivare il menu OSD�
4 + CH - Canale su/giù quando la sorgente è TV, o selezionare un comando
mentre si è nel menu OSD.
5+ VOL - Aumentare/Diminuire il volume o regolare un comando evidenziato
mentre si è nel menu OSD.
Parti e pulsanti
7
Italiano
Collegamento dell'antenna 4
COLLEGAMENTI
Collegare vari dispositivi esterni alla TV
e cambiare le modalità di ingresso per
selezionare un dispositivo esterno� Per
maggiori informazioni sul collegamento di
dispositivi esterni, fare riferimento al manuale
fornito con ogni dispositivo�
I dispositivi esterni disponibili sono i seguenti:
Ricevitori HD, lettori DVD, sistemi audio,
dispositivi di archiviazione USB, PC, e altri
dispositivi esterni�
Collegamento dell'antenna
Collegare la TV ad una presa a parete per
antenna con un cavo RF (75 Ω).
MAKING CONNECTIONS
Connect various external devices to the TV
and switch input modes to select an external
device. For more information of external devices
connection, refer to the manual provided with
each device.
Available external devices are: HD receivers,
DVD players, audio systems, USB
storage devices, PC, and other external
devices.
NOTE
yThe external device connection may differ
from the model.
yConnect external devices to the TV
regardless of the order of the TV port.
yRefer to the external equipments manual
for operating instructions.
yIn PC mode, there may be noise
associated with the resolution, vertical
pattern, contrast or brightness. If noise is
present, change the PC output to another
resolution, change the refresh rate to
another rate or adjust the brightness and
contrast on the PICTURE menu until the
picture is clear.
yIn PC mode, some resolution settings
may not work properly depending on the
graphics card.
Connect the TV to a wall antenna socket with an
RF cable (75 ).
NOTE
yUse a signal splitter to use more than 2
TVs.
yIf the image quality is poor, install a signal
amplifier properly to improve the image
quality.
yIf the image quality is poor with an
antenna connected, try to realign the
antenna in the correct direction.
yAn antenna cable and converter are not
supplied.
ySupported DTV Audio: MPEG, Dolby
Digital.
Antenna connection
SAT/LNB
AERIAL/
CABLE
Utilizzare un duplicatore di segnale per
utilizzare più di 2 TV
Se la qualità dell'immagine è scarsa, installare
un amplicatore di segnale per migliorare la
qualità dell'immagine�
Se la qualità dell'immagine è scarsa con
un'antenna collegata, provare a riallineare
l'antenna nella direzione corretta�
Il cavo antenna ed il convertitore non sono
supportati�
Audio DTV supportato: MPEG, Dolby Digital�
NOTA
MAKING CONNECTIONS
Connect various external devices to the TV
and switch input modes to select an external
device. For more information of external devices
connection, refer to the manual provided with
each device.
Available external devices are: HD receivers,
DVD players, audio systems, USB
storage devices, PC, and other external
devices.
NOTE
yThe external device connection may differ
from the model.
yConnect external devices to the TV
regardless of the order of the TV port.
yRefer to the external equipments manual
for operating instructions.
yIn PC mode, there may be noise
associated with the resolution, vertical
pattern, contrast or brightness. If noise is
present, change the PC output to another
resolution, change the refresh rate to
another rate or adjust the brightness and
contrast on the PICTURE menu until the
picture is clear.
yIn PC mode, some resolution settings
may not work properly depending on the
graphics card.
Connect the TV to a wall antenna socket with an
RF cable (75 ).
NOTE
yUse a signal splitter to use more than 2
TVs.
yIf the image quality is poor, install a signal
amplifier properly to improve the image
quality.
yIf the image quality is poor with an
antenna connected, try to realign the
antenna in the correct direction.
yAn antenna cable and converter are not
supplied.
ySupported DTV Audio: MPEG, Dolby
Digital.
Antenna connection
SAT/LNB
AERIAL/
CABLE
NOTA
Il collegamento del dispositivo esterno potrebbe
di󰀨erire dal modello.
Collegare i dispositivi esterni alla TV senza tener
conto dell'ordine delle porte di quest'ultima�
Fare riferimento al manuale dei dispositivi
esterni per le istruzioni di funzionamento�
In modalità PC, potrebbe vericarsi del rumore
associato con la risoluzione, la congurazione
verticale, il contrasto o la luminosità� Se viene
prodotto del rumore, cambiare l'uscita PC con
un'altra risoluzione, cambiare la frequenza
d'aggiornamento con un'altra frequenza o regolare
la luminosità ed il contrasto nel menu IMMAGINE
no a quando l'immagine non è chiara.
In modalità PC, alcune impostazioni di
risoluzione potrebbero non funzionare
correttamente a seconda della scheda graca.
MAKING CONNECTIONS
Connect various external devices to the TV
and switch input modes to select an external
device. For more information of external devices
connection, refer to the manual provided with
each device.
Available external devices are: HD receivers,
DVD players, audio systems, USB
storage devices, PC, and other external
devices.
NOTE
yThe external device connection may differ
from the model.
yConnect external devices to the TV
regardless of the order of the TV port.
yRefer to the external equipments manual
for operating instructions.
yIn PC mode, there may be noise
associated with the resolution, vertical
pattern, contrast or brightness. If noise is
present, change the PC output to another
resolution, change the refresh rate to
another rate or adjust the brightness and
contrast on the PICTURE menu until the
picture is clear.
yIn PC mode, some resolution settings
may not work properly depending on the
graphics card.
Connect the TV to a wall antenna socket with an
RF cable (75 ).
NOTE
yUse a signal splitter to use more than 2
TVs.
yIf the image quality is poor, install a signal
amplifier properly to improve the image
quality.
yIf the image quality is poor with an
antenna connected, try to realign the
antenna in the correct direction.
yAn antenna cable and converter are not
supplied.
ySupported DTV Audio: MPEG, Dolby
Digital.
Antenna connection
SAT/LNB
AERIAL/
CABLE
ANTENNA/
CAVO
SAT/LNB
8
Italiano
Collegamento di dispositivi esterni
5
Scollegare l'alimentazione quando si collega la TV ad un dispositivo esterno�
La TV può riprodurre diverse sorgenti multimediali collegando diversi terminali con
dispositivi multimediali come lettori DVD, PC, ecc� e selezionando una sorgente di ingresso
corrispondente�
CamcorderDVD playerPC (HDMI-output)Blu-ray disc playerAudio system
DVD player with
component output Headphone
USB
ARCSCART
TV
CI SLOT
The sound
system
HDMI1(ARC)
AERIAL/CABLESAT/LNB
VGA IN PC AUDIO IN
USB EARPHONE
HDMI2 HDMI3
MINI AV IN
MINI
YPBPR IN S/PDIF OUT
CI SLOT
SCART IN
Terminale PC
Lettore DVD con
uscita component
Impianto sonoro
Cu󰀩e
SLOT CI
SCART
TV
ARC
Sistema audio PC
(uscita HDMI) Lettore DVD VideocameraLettore dischi
Blu-ray
USB
9
Italiano
Uso del telecomando 6
1� Puntare il telecomando direttamente verso
il sensore del telecomando nell'angolo in
basso a sinistra del televisore�
2� Il raggio d'azione del telecomando è pari
a circa� 10 metri con angolazioni di circa
30 gradi�
3� Evitare ostacoli tra il telecomando ed il
sensore�
☼ Se non si ha intenzione di utilizzare il
telecomando per un lungo periodo di tempo,
rimuovere le batterie�
☼ Se il telecomando non funziona
correttamente, o se il raggio di funzionamento
è ridotto, sostituire entrambe le batterie con
delle nuove�
Inserimento delle batterie del telecomando
1� Rimuovere il coperchio della batteria tirando e sollevando il pomello sul coperchio�
2� Inserire le batterie, rispettando i segni (+) e (-) sul vano batteria.
3� Rimontare il coperchio della batteria�
ATTENZIONE
Utilizzare solamente le batterie specicate di tipo AAA.
Non mettere insieme batterie vecchie e nuove� Ciò può provocare scricchiolii o perdite, che
possono comportare un rischio di incendio o causare lesioni personali�
Inserire le batterie rispettando i segni (+) e (-). Inserire le batterie in modo scorretto può provocare
perdite, che possono comportare un rischio di incendio o causare lesioni personali�
Smaltire la batteria in conformità alle leggi e alle normative locali�
Tenere le batterie fuori dalla portata di bambini o animali domestici�
Rimuovere le batterie se il telecomando non viene utilizzato per un lungo periodo di tempo�
Funzionamento del telecomando
30 30
IR Receiver
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
Ricevitore IR
10
Italiano
Uso del telecomando
6
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
1. ALIMENTAZIONE Premere per accedere o uscire dalla modalità standby
2. MUTO Premere per attivare o disattivare l'audio�
3. P.MODE Premere per selezionare la modalità immagine�
4. S.MODE Premere per cambiare la modalità audio�
5. FAV Questo pulsante apre l'elenco dei canali preferiti�
6. SLEEP
Questo pulsante abilità la modalità di spegnimento
automatico in questo modo la TV si spegne da sola
dopo il tempo stabilito�
7. FREEZE Questo pulsante blocca il video� Premere di nuovo il
pulsante per sbloccare�
8. CH.LIST Premere per visualizzare l'elenco dei canali�
9. AUTO Premere per regolare automaticamente in modalità VGA�
10. ASPECT Questo pulsante cambia la TV tra modalità di
visualizzazione di󰀨erenti.
11. 0-9 Premere per cambiare il canale della TV
12. -/-- Premere questo pulsante prima di passare ad un
programma maggiore di 09�
13.
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
Premere per ritornare all'ultimo canale visualizzato�
14. MENU Questo pulsante attiva il menu di visualizzazione su
schermo (OSD).
15. EXIT Questo pulsante consente di uscire dal menu OSD�
16. ▲▼◄► Premere i pulsanti direzionali per selezionare opzioni o
impostazioni�
17. OK Il pulsante di conferma, consente di selezionare
l'opzione di menu OSD�
18. SOURCE Premere per visualizzare e selezionare le sorgenti
video disponibili�
19. DISPLAY Premere per visualizzare la nestra delle informazioni.
20. CH (+/-) Questi due pulsanti consentono di cambiare i canali
della TV avanti e indietro�
21. VOL (+/-) Questi due pulsanti consentono di aumentare o
diminuire il volume della TV
22. TEXT Avvio della modalità televideo�
23. EPG Premere per visualizzare il menu elettronico di guida ai
programmi�
24. AUDIO Premere audio per PAL-BG/Stereo o PAL-BG Momo
(ATV) e lingue audio.
25. SUBTITLE Aprire il menu sottotitoli per selezionare i sottotitoli�
26. INDEX
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
Visualizzare un elenco e delle informazioni sulle pagine
del televideo�
Riprodurre il capitolo, il titolo o la traccia precedente�
27. HOLD
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
Mantenere bloccata la pagina di televideo corrente
sullo schermata�
Riprodurre il capitolo, il titolo o la traccia successiva�
28. SIZE
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
È possibile modicare le dimensioni dell'immagine in
modalità televideo�
Premere per eseguire la scansione inversa�
29. REVEAL
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
Visualizzare o rimuovere il contenuto che viene
nascosto in modalità televideo�
Premere per eseguire la scansione in avanti�
30. TIMESHIFT
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
Avviare la funzione di visione di󰀨erita.
Premere per riprodurre o interrompere il programma
corrente�
31. LIST
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
Visualizzare l'elenco dei le PVR.
Premere il pulsante per interrompere il programma corrente�
32.
1. POWER
Press to enter or exit standby mode.
2. MUTE
Press to turn on or off the audio sound.
18.
14.
15.
21.
10.
5.
7.
6.
4.
S.MODE
Press to change the audio mode.
3.
P.MODE
Press to select the picture mode.
19.
DISPLAY
Press to display the information window.
8.
CH.LIST
Press to display the Channel List.
9.
AUTO
Press to adjust automatically in VGA mode.
16.
Press the direction buttons to select menu options or settings.
17.
OK
Confirmation button,select the OSD menuoption.
11.
Press to change the channel of the TV.
12.
-/--
Press this button before entering a programme greater than 09.
13.
Press to return to the channel last viewed.
20.
22.
TEXT
Start the teletext mode.
27.
HOLD
Hold freeze the current teletext page on the screen.
25.
SUBTITLE
Open subtitle menu for subtitle selection.
26.
INDEX
Display a list and information about the teletext pages.
28.
SIZE
LIST
You can change the picture size in the teletext mode.
23.
Press to display electronic program guide menu.
EPG
33.
Display the submenu of the teletext mode.
According to the OSD prompt operation.
SUBPAGE
COLOR
24.
Press audio to PAL-BG/Stereo or PAL-BG Momo(ATV)&Audio Languages.
AUDIO
30.
Press to play or stop the current program.
Start the time-shift function.
Display the PVR file list.
To play the next chapter,title or track.
Press to scan in forword.
Press to scan in reuerse.
34.
To play the previous chapter,title or track.
31.
Press the botton to stop the current program.
32.
Press to start recording.
29.
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
Display or remove the content that is hidden in teletext mode.
+
SOURCE
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
MENU EXIT
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
FREEZE
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
TIMESHIFT
LIST
7
4
19
9
13
17
14
24
10
25
27
22
3
5
6
2
18
8
1
11
12
15
16
20
28
26
30
21
23
29
33
31
34
32
Premere per avviare la registrazione�
33. SUBPAGE Visualizzare il sottomenu della modalità televideo�
34. COLORE Secondo l'operazione OSD richiesta�
11
Italiano
Accensione e spegnimento della TV
Premere il pulsante ALIMENTAZIONE sul telecomando�
È inoltre possibile utilizzare il pulsante di accensione sul lato
inferiore/sul lato del pannello�
* Se non viene rilevato nessun segnale di ingresso entro
15 minuti, la TV si spegnerà automaticamente�
Prima congurazione
Collegare un cavo RF dall'ingresso della TV chiamato "RF-In" e alla presa per antenna TV
Selezionare la lingua
Premere il pulsante ◄/► per selezionare la lingua da utilizzare per i menu e i messaggi.
Selezionare il paese
Premere il pulsante ▼/▲ per evidenziare il menu del paese.
Premere il pulsante ◄/► per selezionare il paese desiderato.
OK
Germany
Environment
Digital Type
Home Mode
DVB-T
Stato di sintonizzazione automatica
Per la sintonizzazione ATV, premere Menu e la freccia sinistra per saltare la sintonizzazione ATV, per
la sintonizzazione DTV, premere Menu e la freccia sinistra per saltare la sintonizzazione DTV
Thailand
OK
Cambio dei canali
1� Utilizzo dei pulsanti dei canali
Premere il pulsante +CH- per cambiare i canali, e la TV cambia
i canali in sequenza� Saranno visibili tutti i canali che sono stati
memorizzati� I canali cancellati o non memorizzati non verranno
visualizzati�
* Per ritornare al canale precedente, premere il pulsante
P.MODE S.MODE FAV SLEEP
CH.LIST AUTO
ASPECT
MENU EXIT
FREEZE
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
0
-/--
+
SOURCE
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
LIST
Funzionamento base della TV 7
12
Italiano
Regolazione del volume
Premere + VOL - per regolare il volume�
Per disattivare il volume, premere MUTO
Per ripristinare il volume, premere di nuovo MUTO,
o premere direttamente VOL +
Selezione della sorgente di ingresso
Per selezionare TV o altre fonti di ingresso esterne collegate alla TV
1� Premere il pulsante Source per visualizzare l'elenco delle
sorgenti di ingresso�
2� Premere ▼/▲ o il pulsante SOURCE per selezionare la
sorgente di ingresso desiderata� (Satellitare, DTV, ATV,
AV, PC, SCART, Componente, HDMI, Media).
3� Premere il pulsante OK per inserire la sorgente di
ingresso�
4� Premere il pulsante EXIT per uscire�
+
SOURCE
TEXT EPG
HOLD
INDEX
SUBPAGE
SIZE
-
+
-
DISPLAY
CH VOL
Audio
SUBTITLE
REVEAL
TIMESHIFT
LIST
OK
HDMI3
Funzionamento base della TV
7
13
Italiano
Funzionamento menu 8
Le seguenti operazioni devono essere utilizzate nelle impostazioni di menu nei capitoli successivi�
Tenere a mente le operazioni�
Le istruzioni e gli schemi dell'impostazione del menu vengono generalmente fatti nella sorgente
del segnale TV� Le eccezioni verranno notate separatamente�
Alcuni componenti non sono regolabili in diverse sorgenti di segnale�
Accedere al menu
Premere il pulsante [MENU] per visualizzare il menu principale�
Premere il pulsante [◄/►] per selezionare il menu che si desidera avere nel menu principale.
Premere il pulsante [OK] o [▼/▲] per accedere al menu.
Funzionamento menu
[▼/▲]: Selezionare l'opzione che si desidera regolare nel menu.
[◄/►]: Regolare o accedere al sottomenu.
[OK]:Accedere al sottomenu o confermare�
Uscire dal menu
Premere il pulsante [MENU] per ritornare al menu precedente o uscire dal menu; oppure premere
il pulsante [EXIT] per uscire dal menu�
Questo menu funziona solamente in modalità TV
CANALE
Menu Dei Canali
1� Sintonizzazione automatica
Premere il pulsante ▼/▲ per selezionare Sintonizzazione automatica, poi premere il pulsante
OK/► per accedere.
2� Sintonizzazione manuale ATV
Premere il pulsante ▼/▲ per selezionare Sintonizzazione manuale ATV, poi premere il pulsante
OK per accedere al sottomenu. Premere il pulsante ◄/► per selezionare il canale, poi premere il
pulsante OK per cercare il programma�
3� Sintonizzazione manuale DTV
Premere il pulsante ▼/▲ per selezionare Sintonizzazione manuale DTV, poi premere il pulsante
OK per accedere al sottomenu. Premere il pulsante ◄/► per selezionare il canale, poi premere il
pulsante OK per cercare il programma�
4� Modica del programma
Premere il pulsante ▼/▲ per selezionare Modica programma, poi premere il pulsante OK per
accedere al sottomenu�
5� Elenco programmazione
Premere il pulsante ▼/▲ per selezionare Elenco programmazione, poi premere il pulsante OK
per accedere al sottomenu� È disponibile in sorgente�
6� Informazioni sul segnale
Premere il pulsante ▼/▲ per selezionare Informazioni sul segnale, poi premere il pulsante OK per
vedere le informazioni dettagliate sul segnale. Disponibile solamente quando c'è segnale in DTV.
7� Informazioni CI
Premere il pulsante ▼/▲ per selezionare Informazioni CI, poi premere il pulsante OK per
accedere al sottomenu�
14
Italiano
IMMAGINE L'opzione disponibile per la regolazione potrebbe di󰀨erire nelle sorgenti
di segnale di󰀨erenti, tuttavia le funzioni dell'opzione rimarranno invariate.
Menu Immagine
1. Modalità immagine
Premere il pulsante ▼/▲ per selezionare Modalità immagine, poi premere il pulsante OK per
accedere al sottomenu. È possibile modicare il valore del contrasto, della luminosità, del colore,
della nitidezza e della tonalità quando l'immagine è in Modalità personale.
2. Contrasto/Luminosità/Colore/Tonalità/Nitidezza
Queste impostazioni possono essere modicate soltanto quando la Modalità immagine è
impostata su User
Premere il pulsante ▼/▲ per selezionare l'opzione, poi premere il pulsante ◄/► per regolare.
3. Temperatura colore
Premere il pulsante ▼/▲ per selezionare Temperatura colore, poi premere il pulsante OK per
accedere al sottomenu�
Premere il pulsante ▼/▲ per selezionare. (Modalità immagine disponibile: Fredda, Normale, Calda).
4. Riduzione del rumore
Per ltrare e ridurre il rumore dell'immagine e migliorare la qualità di quest'ultima.
Premere il pulsante ▼/▲ per selezionare Riduzione del rumore, poi premere il pulsante OK per
accedere al sottomenu�
5. Modalità HDMI
Premere il pulsante ▼/▲ per selezionare Modalità HDMI, poi premere il pulsante OK per
accedere al sottomenu�
AUDIO
Menu Audio
1. Modalità audio
Selezionare la modalità audio preferita� I valori di acuti e bassi sono disponibili in modalità
Utente, è possibile regolarli come desiderato.
2. Acuti/Bassi
Premere il pulsante ▼/▲ per selezionare l'opzione, Premere il pulsante ◄/► per regolare.
Gli acuti e i bassi sono disponibili solo in modalità Utente, è possibile regolarli come desiderato.
3. Equilibrio
Premere il pulsante ▼/▲ per selezionare l'opzione, Premere il pulsante ◄/► per regolare.
4. Livello di volume automatico
Premere il pulsante ▼/▲ per selezionare Livello di volume automatico, poi premere il pulsante
OK per selezionare Attiva o Disattiva�
5. Modalità SPDIF
Premere il pulsante ▼/▲ per selezionare Modalità SPDIF, poi premere il pulsante OK per
selezionare Disattiva/PCM/Automatica�
6. Interruttore audiodescrizione
Premere il pulsante ▼/▲ per selezionare Audiodescrizione, poi premere il pulsante OK per
selezionare Attiva o Disattiva� Funzione ambliopia per i non vedenti, le tracce vengono mixate per
descrivere la schermata corrente� È necessario il supporto della corrente fredda�
NOTA:
Equilibrio: Con questa opzione è possibile regolare le prestazioni dell'altoparlante, consentendo
di sentire al meglio dalla propria posizione�
Volume automatico: Questa opzione viene utilizzata per ridurre automaticamente la di󰀨erenza
di volume tra il canale ed il programma�
8Funzionamento menu
15
Italiano
Funzionamento menu 8
ORA
Menu Ora
1. Orologio
Premere il pulsante ▼/▲ per selezionare:Data/Mese/Anno/Ora/Minuto.
Premere il pulsante ▼/▲ per congurare l'orologio.
2. Ora locale
Premere il pulsante ▼/▲ per selezionare Ora locale, poi premere il pulsante OK per accedere al
sottomenu�
3. Timer di spegnimento automatico
Selezionare l'ora e i minuti desiderati per lo spegnimento automatico della TVAnnullare
impostando il timer su Disattiva�
4. Standby automatico
Premere il pulsante ▼/▲ per selezionare Standby automatico, poi premere OK per accedere al
sottomenu�
Se il telecomando non effettua alcuna operazione nel tempo impostato, si spegnerà
automaticamente� Se si esegue un'operazione, verrà ripristinato il tempo�
5. Timer OSD
Premere il pulsante ▼/▲ per selezionare Timer OSD, poi premere il pulsante OK per accedere al
sottomenu�
NOTA:
L'orologio cambierà in base all'area selezionata nell'Ora locale�
BLOCCO
Menu Di Bloccoo
1. Sistema di blocco
Premere il pulsante ▼/▲ per selezionare Sistema di blocco, poi premere il pulsante OK per
e󰀨ettuate le 3 seguenti operazioni disponibili. La password predenita è 0000, e nel caso in cui
viene dimenticata la password inserita, chiamare il centro assistenza.
2. Impostazione della password
Premere il pulsante ▼/▲ per selezionare Imposta password, poi premere il pulsante OK per
accedere al sottomenu e impostare una nuova password.
3. Blocco canale
Premere il pulsante ▼/▲ per selezionare Blocco canale, poi premere il pulsante OK per
accedere al sottomenu e selezionare� Premere il tasto verde per bloccare o sbloccare il canale�
4. Controllo dei genitori
Premere il pulsante ▼/▲ per selezionare Controllo dei genitori, poi premere il pulsante OK per
accedere al sottomenu e selezionare l'età adatta per i propri bambini�
5. Blocco tasti
Premere il pulsante ▼/▲ per selezionare Blocco tasti, poi premere ◄/► per selezionare Attiva o
Disattiva�
Quando lo stato di Blocco tasti è attivo, non è possibile utilizzare i pulsanti.
6. Modalità hotel
Premere il pulsante ▼/▲ per selezionare Modalità hotel, poi premere il pulsante OK per
selezionare Attiva o Disattiva�
16
Italiano
Funzionamento menu
8
CONFIGURAZIONE
Menu Di Congurazione
1. Lingua
Impostare la lingua di visualizzazione�
2. Lingua di inserimento del testo
Premere il pulsante ▼/▲ per selezionare Lingua di inserimento del testo, poi premere il pulsante
OK per accedere al sottomenu�
3. Lingue audio
Premere il pulsante ▼/▲ per selezionare Lingue audio, poi premere il pulsante OK per accedere
al sottomenu�
4. Lingua dei sottotitoli
Premere il pulsante ▼/▲ per selezionare Lingua dei sottotitoli, poi premere il pulsante OK per
accedere al sottomenu�
5. Persone non udenti
Premere il pulsante ▼/▲ per selezionare Persone non udenti, poi premere il pulsante ◄/► per
selezionare Attiva o Disattiva�
6. File di sistema PVR
Premere il pulsante ▼/▲ per selezionare File di sistema PVR, poi premere il pulsante OK per
accedere al sottomenu�
Premere il pulsante ▼/▲ per selezionare Verica le di sistema PVR, Poi premere il pulsante OK
per accedere. Successivamente verrà vericata la velocità USB.
7. Rapporto di aspetto
Impostare il rapporto di aspetto della schermata�
8. Schermata blu
Impostare il colore dello sfondo in blu o nero quando non c'è segnale di ingresso.
9. Prima installazione
Premere il pulsante ▼/▲ per selezionare Prima installazione, poi premere il pulsante OK per accedere.
10. Ripristino
Premere il pulsante ▼/▲ per selezionare Ripristino, poi premere il pulsante OK per accedere al
sottomenu�
11. Aggiornamento software(USB)
Premere il pulsante ▼/▲ per selezionare Aggiornamento software (USB), inserire il proprio
dispositivo USB nello slot USB, poi premere il pulsante OK per aggiornare il software corretto.
12. CEC HDMI
Premere il pulsante ▼/▲ per selezionare CEC HDMI, poi premere il pulsante OK per accedere
al sottomenu�
13. Ambiente
Premere il pulsante ▼/▲ per selezionare Ambiente, poi premere il pulsante ◄/► per selezionare
Modalità casa o Modalità negozio�
17
Italiano
Multimedia 9
Nota: Prima di utilizzare il menu Media, Inserire un dispositivo USB, poi premere il pulsante
SOURCE per impostare la sorgente di ingresso su Media�
Premere il pulsante ▼/▲ per selezionare Media nel menu Sorgente, poi premere il pulsante OK
per accedere�
Dopo che il televisore ha riconosciuto un dispositivo di archiviazione USB, premere il pulsante ◄
o ►per selezionare foto/musica/lm/testo, e premere il pulsante OK per accedere alla medesima
funzione di foto/musica/lm/testo.
jlbhd.jpg
Pause
Info.
jlbhd.jpg
Play
Play
Aa
Char Set 1
Time 14:30:58
Date Fri Mar 14, 2014
-----------------------------------
-----------------------------------
------
-----------------------------------
-----------------------------------
------
Music Playlist
Aa
Char Set
Previous P...
1� Premere il pulsante ◄ o ► per scegliere eventualmente la sottocartella, poi premere OK per
accedere alla cartella� Premere il pulsante OK per riprodurre, premere il pulsante exit per
tornare indietro� Premere il pulsante OK per selezionare la cartella superiore, e per ritornare
al livello di menu precedente, premere i pulsanti ◄ o ► per sfogliare le pagine.
2� Premere il pulsante ► per avviare la riproduzione o mettere in pausa� Premere il pulsante
per interrompere la riproduzione�
3� Premere il pulsante per riprodurre l'ultimo elemento� Premere il pulsante per riprodurre
l'elemento successivo�
18
Italiano
Precauzioni durante l'utilizzo di un dispositivo USB
MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) non è supportato.
Capacità HDD massima: 500 GB�
L'unità supporta solo USB Flash Drive in formato FAT32� Questa TV non garantisce USB Flash
Drive in altri formati (come FAT16 o NTFS).
Alcuni tipi di videocamere digitali USB e dispositivi audio potrebbero non essere compatibili
con la TV� Solo la sorgente Media garantisce il supporto USB Flash Drive� Altri dispositivi come
lettori di schede ash, USB HDD, videocamere digitali e dispositivi audio potrebbero non essere
compatibili con la TV
Se un dispositivo USB richiede una potenza elevata (più di 500 mA o 5 V), il dispositivo USB
potrebbe non essere supportato�
La TV non supporta dispositivi USB con partizioni multiple�
Collegare direttamente alla porta USB della propria TV� Se si utilizza una connessione via cavo
separata o tramite hub USB, potrebbero vericarsi problemi di compatibilità USB.
Prima di collegare il proprio dispositivo alla TV, eseguire il backup dei le per evitare il
danneggiamento o la perdita dei dati. Qualsiasi danneggiamento o perdita di dati è a rischio
esclusivo dell'utente�
Maggiore è la risoluzione dell'immagine, maggiore sarà il tempo per la visualizzazione su
schermo�
La velocità di rilevamento di un dispositivo USB varia da dispositivo a dispositivo�
Per le non supportati o corrotti, viene visualizzato il messaggio "unsupported File (File non
supportato)".
I le MP3 con DRM che sono stati scaricati da siti non gratuiti non possono essere riprodotti.
Digital Rights Management (DRM) è una tecnologia che supporta la creazione di contenuto, la
distribuzione e la gestione del contenuto in maniera ampia e integrata, tra cui la protezione dei
diritti e degli interessi dei fornitori del contenuto, la prevenzione della copia illecita dei contenuti,
nonché la gestione delle fatturazioni e delle transazioni�
Per spostarsi su una foto, il caricamento può richiedere alcuni secondi� A questo punto, l'icona di
caricamento apparirà sulla schermata�
Se viene collegato un lettore di scheda USB, il suo volume potrebbe non essere rilevato�
Se il dispositivo USB non funziona correttamente, scollegare e ricollegare di nuovo�
Vericare se il dispositivo USB funziona correttamente con il proprio PC.
TIPO CONTENITORE ESTENSIONE FILE
Immagine JPEG .jpg, .jpeg
BMP .bmp
Audio MP3 .mp3
Video MP4 .mp4
MPG .mpg
9Multimedia
19
Italiano
Risoluzione dei problemi 10
Prima di contattare il personale di assistenza, controllare la guida seguente alla risoluzione dei
problemi� Se i problemi persistono, scollegare il televisore e richiedere assistenza�
Sintomi Lista di controllo
Nessuna immagine,
nessun suono
Assicurarsi che l'alimentazione principale della TV sia accesa�
Controllare il collegamento del cavo di alimentazione e/o di
altri cavi�
Immagine normale,
nessun suono
Controllare il livello del volume�
Assicurarsi che il pulsante
Select “Auto Adjust“ to adjust the image.
sia stato premuto�
Controllare il collegamento di apparecchiature esterne�
Qualità del colore scarsa o
nessun colore, audio normale
Controllare il livello del valore di “Luminosità” e “Contrasto” nel
menu IMMAGINE�
Immagini multiple,
audio normale
Controllare il collegamento dell'antenna e la direzione�
Sintonia ne della TV.
Controllare il collegamento di apparecchiature esterne�
La stazione TV potrebbe avere delle di󰀩coltà di trasmissione.
Provare un altro canale�
Immagine bianca, qualità
audio scarsa
Controllare il collegamento dell'antenna e la direzione�
La stazione TV potrebbe avere delle di󰀩coltà di trasmissione.
Provare un altro canale�
Interferenza discontinua Assicurarsi che la fonte di interferenza sia ben protetta�
Rimuovere questi tipi di dispositivi elettrici in prossimità della TV
Qualità scarsa del
suono stereo
La stazione TV potrebbe avere delle di󰀩coltà di trasmissione.
Provare a cambiare in modalità mono�
Il telecomando non funziona� Assicurarsi che le batterie siano state inserite correttamente�
Le batterie potrebbero essersi esaurite� Sostituire con delle
batterie nuove�
Rimuovere tutti gli ostacoli tra il telecomando ed il sensore del
telecomando�
Assicurarsi che sul sensore del telecomando non ci sia
un'intensità di luce troppo elevata�
Sulla schermata appare
No Signal
La TV non riesce a rilevare segnali da nessun terminale di
ingresso�
Assicurarsi che il cavo sia collegato in modo corretto e stabile�
Assicurarsi che l'alimentazione di qualsiasi apparecchiatura
esterna sia accesa�
Sulla schermata appare
No Signal” o
Unsupported Signal
(solo in modalità RGB)
Assicurarsi che la modalità di risoluzione dello schermo
e della frequenza dal proprio PC sia valida per la TV
Fare riferimento alla tabella sul segnale di ingresso RGB
consigliato�
L'immagine non è centrata
(solo in modalità PC)
Selezionare “Regolazione automatica” per regolare
l'immagine�
20
Italiano
Speciche
11
Modello 24 32 43
Dimensioni del pannello LED
(Retroilluminazione LED) 23,8” 32” 43”
Risoluzione nativa 1920 × 1080 1920 × 1080 1920 × 1080
Sistemi video (RF) PAL, SECAM PAL, SECAM PAL, SECAM
Sistema audio (RF) D/K, I , BG D/K, I , BG D/K, I , BG
Altoparlanti integrati 2,5 W x 2 6 W x 2 8 W x 2
Consumo di energia in
standby ≤0,50 W ≤0,50 W ≤0,50 W
Alimentazione vedere l'etichetta
sul retro
vedere l'etichetta
sul retro
vedere l'etichetta
sul retro
Consumo di energia vedere l'etichetta
sul retro
vedere l'etichetta
sul retro
vedere l'etichetta
sul retro
Segnali di supporto
YPbPr VGA HDMI(DVI)
480i 640X480 480i
576i 800X600 576i
480P 1024X768 480P
576P 1366X768 576P
720P 1920X1080 720P
1080i 1080i
1080P 1080P
NOTA: Design e speciche possono essere soggetti a cambiamenti senza preavviso.
Smaltimento
Packaging
The product has been packaged to protect it from damage in transit. The packaging is made
of materials that can be recycled in an environmentally friendly manner.
Device
Old devices should not be disposed of with the normal household rubbish. In accordance
with Directive 2012/19/EU, the device must be properly disposed of at the end of its service
life. This involves separating the materials in the device for the purpose of recycling and pre-
venting any impact on the environment. Take old devices to a collection point for electrical
scrap or a recycling centre. Contact your local waste disposal company or your local authori-
ty for more information on this subject.
Batteries
Do not dispose of used batteries in the household rubbish! They should be taken to a collec-
tion point for used batteries.
Imballaggio
Il prodotto è stato imballato per evitare danni durante il trasporto. L'imballaggio è
costituito da materiali che possono essere riciclati rispettando l'ambiente�
Packaging
The product has been packaged to protect it from damage in transit. The packaging is made
of materials that can be recycled in an environmentally friendly manner.
Device
Old devices should not be disposed of with the normal household rubbish. In accordance
with Directive 2012/19/EU, the device must be properly disposed of at the end of its service
life. This involves separating the materials in the device for the purpose of recycling and pre-
venting any impact on the environment. Take old devices to a collection point for electrical
scrap or a recycling centre. Contact your local waste disposal company or your local authori-
ty for more information on this subject.
Batteries
Do not dispose of used batteries in the household rubbish! They should be taken to a collec-
tion point for used batteries.
Apparecchiature
Le vecchie apparecchiature non devono essere smaltite assieme ai riuti domestici.
In conformità con la Direttiva 2012/19/UE, l'apparecchiatura deve essere smaltita
in modo corretto al termine della sua vite utile� Ciò comporta la separazione dei
materiali presenti nell'apparecchiatura per il riciclaggio e la prevenzione degli
impatti sull'ambiente� Portare le vecchie apparecchiature ad un punto di raccolta
per rottami elettrici o ad un centro di riciclaggio� Contattare la propria azienda locale
per lo smaltimento dei riuti o le proprie autorità locali per maggiori informazioni
sull'argomento�
Packaging
The product has been packaged to protect it from damage in transit. The packaging is made
of materials that can be recycled in an environmentally friendly manner.
Device
Old devices should not be disposed of with the normal household rubbish. In accordance
with Directive 2012/19/EU, the device must be properly disposed of at the end of its service
life. This involves separating the materials in the device for the purpose of recycling and pre-
venting any impact on the environment. Take old devices to a collection point for electrical
scrap or a recycling centre. Contact your local waste disposal company or your local authori-
ty for more information on this subject.
Batteries
Do not dispose of used batteries in the household rubbish! They should be taken to a collec-
tion point for used batteries.
Batterie
Non gettare le batterie usate nei riuti domestici! Le batterie devono essere portate
ad un punto di raccolta per batterie usate�
Serviceinformation
TechniSat hereby declares that the Wegavision FHD24A/32A/43A is compliant with the basic requirements
and other relevant provisions of the 2014/53/EU directive. The declaration of conformity can be found at the
following address:
http://konf.tsat.de/?ID=11704
Your TV bears the CE symbol and complies with all requisite EU standards. Subject to change for
amendments and printing errors Version 07/17. Duplication and reproduction only with the publisher's
approval
Wegavision FHD24A, Wegavision 32A, Wegavision 43A and TechniSat are registered Trademarks of:
TechniSat Digital GmbH
PO Box 560
D-54541 Daun, Germany
www.technisat.de
Nordmende is a Trademark of Technicolor or ist affiliates used under licence by TechniSat Digital GmbH.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are brands or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC
Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Audio and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Technical Hotline: Mo. - Fr. 8:00 - 20:00, Tel.: 06592/712 1500.
Caution!
If you encounter a problem with this equipment, please contact our Technical Hotline in the first instance.
If the TV needs to be sent to us for any reason please only use the following address:
TechniSat Teledigital GmbH
Service Center
Nordstr. 4a
D-39418 Stassfurt, Germany
FLACHBILDFERNSEHER Nordmende Wegavision FHD24A/32A/43A 2237820240010
102


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Nordmende Wegavision FHD24A at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Nordmende Wegavision FHD24A in the language / languages: English, German, French, Italian, Polish as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 35,8 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info